JP2023119826A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine for preventing a feeling of incongruity from being given to a player by displaying decorative identification information and an unnatural mode of a reservation display.SOLUTION: A game machine performs a variation start action of a decorative pattern during a reservation shift display following start of a variation display, and does not start a scroll display of a decorative pattern until completion of a shift display for switching a first reservation display displayed in a first display area from the left in a special pattern reservation storage display area in an active display area as an active display. A common shift display can be performed in execution of a variable display on the basis of a first kind of variation pattern designation command and in execution of a variable display on the basis of a second kind of variation pattern designation command.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 42

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player by executing variable display of constant identification information and deriving a specific display result as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information.

As a pachinko game machine typified by gaming machines, there have been some that variably display multiple types of decoration identification information (decorative patterns) corresponding to the variable display of specific identification information (special patterns) (for example, patent Reference 1). In addition, a complete notification mode was provided as one of the production modes, and in the complete notification mode, a patrol image imitating a lamp was displayed in the center of the display means, and the patrol image was illuminated when announcing the election (for example, , see Patent Document 2).

JP 2017-86392 A JP 2019-146680 A

There is room for improving the marketability of the game machine having the functions and configurations of both Patent Document 1 and Patent Document 2 above.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine with improved marketability.

The gaming machine according to claim 1,
A gaming machine that executes variable display of specific identification information, and is controllable to an advantageous state for a player when a specific display result is derived as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
game control means;
production control means;
a display means;
The display means is
In the scene before the announcement, displaying the announcement object in the non-announcement mode and displaying the character in the first display mode,
when the specific display result is derived, after the pre-announcement scene, displaying the notification object in an announcement mode and displaying the character in a second display mode different from the first display mode;
When the specific display result is not derived, after the pre-announcement scene, the notification object is displayed in a non-announcement mode, and the character is displayed in a third display mode different from the first display mode and the second display mode. death,
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information,
The effect control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information,
In one production mode, a plurality of types of background images including a first background image and a second background image can be switched and displayed,
When the background image is switched from the first background image to the second background image, background fade-out display is performed to gradually increase the transparency of the first background image and erase it, and the background fade-out display of the first background image is performed. is capable of executing a background fade-in display in which the transparency of the second background image is gradually reduced when executing
When the variable display of the decoration identification information is started, identification information fade-out display can be executed in which the transparency of the decoration identification information is gradually increased and erased,
When ending the variable display of the decoration identification information, identification information fade-in display can be executed in which the transparency of the decoration identification information is gradually reduced,
the execution period of the background fade-in display is longer than the execution period of the identification information fade-in display;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the fade-in display basically gives the impression that the fade-in display is performed in a short period of time, so that the variable display of the decoration identification information and the background change may be performed at the same time. In some cases, it can be noted that the variable display of the decoration identification information ends when the identification information fade-in display is performed in a shorter period of time than the background fade-in display. Furthermore, by changing the display mode of the character supplementarily while suggesting the winning or not in the mode of the notification object, winning or non-winning can be communicated in an easy-to-understand manner.

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention as well as the matters specifying the invention other than the matters specifying the invention. It can be anything.

1 is a front view showing a gaming machine according to Embodiment 1; FIG. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a figure which illustrates a production|presentation control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit type determination table, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of big hit types. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a variation pattern; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a variation pattern determination table; It is explanatory drawing which shows the data holding area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an effect control data holding area, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a start winning command buffer. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of start winning a prize judging processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; It is a figure for demonstrating a decoration design and a small design. (A1) and (A2) are the first production mode, (B1) and (B2) are the second production mode, (C1) and (C2) are the third production mode, and (D1) and (D2) are the fourth production mode. FIG. 10 shows. (A1) and (A2) are diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display area and the decoration pattern in the first effect mode, and (B1) and (B2) in the second effect mode. (C1) and (C2) are the third effect mode, (D1) and (D2) are diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display area and the decoration pattern in the fourth effect mode, and (E) is the variable display of the decoration pattern and the small pattern. It is a diagram for explaining the aspect of , (A) is a variation start action of decorative symbols, (B) is a variation stop action, and (C) is a loop action. (A) is a diagram comparing various actions of decorative patterns and periods of lamp light emission control, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of loop light emission control of the lamp. (A1) to (A4) and (B1) to (B4) are diagrams for explaining an operation example of the hold display. It is a figure which shows the flow of the variable display of the decoration design in 1st production|presentation mode. 26. It is a figure which shows the flow of the variable display of a decorative design following FIG. It is a figure which shows the flow of the variable display of the decoration design in 2nd production|presentation mode. 28. It is a figure which shows the flow of the variable display of a decorative design following FIG. 28. It is a figure which shows the detail of the flow of the variable display of the decoration design of FIG. It is a figure which shows the flow of the variable display of the decoration design as the modification 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the flow of the variable display of a decorative design following FIG. It is a figure which shows the flow of the variable display of the decoration design in 3rd production|presentation mode. It is a figure for demonstrating the appearance of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the flow of the variable display of the decoration design in 4th production|presentation mode. It is a figure which shows the flow of the stop display of the decoration design in 1st production|presentation mode (2nd production|presentation mode). It is a figure which shows the flow of the stop display of a decorative design following FIG. (A) to (G) are diagrams showing the flow of stop display of decorative symbols when the number of pending memories is 3 in the first effect mode (second effect mode). (A) and (B) are diagrams showing the flow of stop display of decorative symbols in the fourth effect mode (third effect mode). (A1) is a diagram showing a first background image, (A2) is a diagram showing a first predetermined background image, and (B) is a diagram explaining a background change. It is a figure which shows the flow of a background change in 1st production|presentation mode. It is a timing chart showing the flow of each part of the variable display in the first effect mode. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of each part of the variable display in 2nd production|presentation mode. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of each part of the variable display in 3rd production mode and 4th production mode. (A) is a 1st production mode, (B) is a 2nd production mode, (C) is a timing chart which shows the aspect of each part at the time of the variable display start in a 3rd production mode and a 4th production mode. It is a figure which shows the operation example of a customer waiting demonstration production. It is a figure which shows the example of an operation|movement when starting prize-winning generate|occur|produces during the customer waiting demonstration production. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the flow of pseudo consecutive notices; (A) is a diagram showing an example of pseudo-run number display and symbol colors, (B) is a diagram showing pseudo-run number display and symbol color types, and (C) is a diagram showing a pseudo-run number display color determination table. . It is a figure which shows the flow of reach production|presentation. 50. It is a figure which shows the flow of the ready-to-win production following FIG. It is a figure which shows the operation example of each part in reach production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the flow of SP reach production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the flow of SP ready-to-win production following FIG. It is a figure which shows the operation example of each part in SP reach production|presentation. (A1) to (A7) are diagrams showing Modification 2 of the present invention. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing Modified Example 3 of the present invention. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table used in a low probability state. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table used in a high probability state. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows an example of production mode decision processing performed in ending production processing. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of super reach (battle). It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of super reach (battle). It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of super reach (battle). It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of super reach (battle). It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of super reach (battle). It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of super reach (battle). FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of fanfare effects executed in a low probability state; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of fanfare effects executed in a low probability state; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of fanfare effects executed in a low probability state; It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of ending production|presentation. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a patrol lamp used in super reach (patto patrol attack). FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of Super Reach (Patopato Attack); FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of Super Reach (Patopato Attack); FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a modified example in which repeated hitting operations are required in super reach (patto attack); FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of Super Reach (Patopato Attack); FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of Super Reach (Patopato Attack); It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of super reach (powerful RUSH). It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of super reach (powerful RUSH). FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a modified example in which repeated hitting operations are required in super reach (powerful RUSH); It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of super reach (powerful RUSH). FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of fanfare effects executed in a high probability state; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of fanfare effects executed in a high probability state; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a modification in which a patrol lamp image and a push button image are displayed in motion during the motion promotion period; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of each effect period when a super reach (battle) is a big hit; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of each performance period when a super reach (powerful RUSH) results in a big hit; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of each effect period when a super reach (patto attack) results in a big hit; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of each effect period when each super reach results in a deviation; It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the shaking display period of the decoration pattern according to the timing when notification is performed by depressing operation of the push button 31B in a super reach (powerful RUSH) jackpot. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the shaking display period of the decoration pattern according to the timing when notification is performed by continuous hitting operation of the push button 31B in the modification of a super reach (powerful RUSH) jackpot. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the effect period corresponding to the timing of notification by the depression operation of the push button 31B in the super reach (Patopatakku) jackpot. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect period corresponding to the timing at which a notification is given by repeatedly hitting a push button 31B in a modified example of a super reach (patto attack) jackpot. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the effect period of the fanfare effect executed in the low-probability state; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the effect period of fanfare effect executed in a high probability state; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a modification in which a light-collecting effect effect is performed before the action promoting period; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation period of a light condensing effect presentation; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a modified example of a patrol trump image displayed when no winning is made;

A form for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on the embodiment.

[Mode 1] (No. 1)
The game machine of form 1 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The production control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decoration pattern in the effect control process processing of step S76). part),
The size is smaller than the decoration identification information, and it is possible to variably display the reduced identification information corresponding to each of the plurality of types of decoration identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can reduce the size corresponding to the decoration pattern). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
The variable display of the decoration identification information includes a movement display (for example, scroll display, see FIG. 21) for moving the decoration identification information,
The variable display of the reduced identification information is switching display (for example, switching display, see FIG. 22(E)) for switching to other reduced identification information without moving the reduced identification information,
In the variable display of the reduced identification information, one decoration identification information is displayed in the variable display of the decoration identification information, and the reduced identification information is switched a plurality of times during a period until the display of the decoration identification information is finished. is possible (for example, one decoration pattern is displayed, and in the period Ta2 until the display of the decoration pattern finishes displaying, the small patterns are switched five times to the small patterns of the losing combination, and each is displayed over the period Ta1. (period Ta1<period Ta2), see FIG. 22(E)),
The display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information is composed of a combination of the decoration identification information (for example, a combination of decoration patterns such as "111" and "326"),
The display result of the variable display of the reduced identification information is composed of a combination of the reduced identification information (for example, a combination of small patterns such as "111" and "326"),
When a non-specific combination that is a combination of the decoration identification information corresponding to the non-specific display result other than the specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information, the variable display of the decoration identification information is performed. Before the display result is derived, the reduced identification information is switched so that the combination of the reduced identification information does not correspond to the non-specific combination in the variable display of the reduced identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 , If it is decided to stop display the fixed decorative pattern of the lost combination (for example, "326"), start the variable display of the decorative pattern, and then the fixed decorative pattern of the lost combination (for example, "326") 22(E)), before stopping the display of the
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when a non-specific combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information, the variable display of the reduced identification information is performed before the display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information is derived. Since the reduced identification information is switched so as not to become a combination of reduced identification information corresponding to the non-specific combination, the non-specific combination is displayed as a display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information from the combination of the reduced identification information in the variable display of the reduced identification information It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest without being known in advance that the information is derived.

[Mode 2] (No. 2)
The game machine of form 2 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
Light emitting means (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means can variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform decoration in the effect control process processing of step S76). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
The display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information is composed of a combination of the decoration identification information stopped in the effective display area among the plurality of decoration identification information displayed in the display area (for example, the decoration pattern display areas 5L and 5C). , The part that becomes a big hit or loses by combining decoration patterns such as "111" and "326" stopped at the stop position of 5R),
When a non-specific combination that is a combination of the decoration identification information corresponding to non-specific display results other than the specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information, the decoration identification information is effectively displayed. When stopped in the area, it is possible to display the decoration identification information in an enlarged form from the normal size and then return it to the normal size. 36 to 38, 42 and 43), a portion that can execute a change stop action when temporarily stopping display of decorative symbols in the display;
When enlarging and displaying the decoration identification information to be stopped in the effective display area, the decoration identification information not located in the effective display area is not displayed in an enlarged manner (see Modification 3 of FIG. 57),
During execution of the variable display of the decoration identification information, a predetermined light emission control is repeatedly performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode for a predetermined light emission period, and the decoration identification information stopped in the effective display area is enlarged and displayed. (For example, even when the effect control CPU 120 is executing the fluctuation stop action when temporarily stopping and displaying the decorative pattern, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, A portion where the loop light emission control of the movable body lamp 9d is performed (see FIGS. 42 and 43)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when a non-specific combination that is a combination of the decoration identification information corresponding to the non-specific display result is derived as the display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information, the decoration identification information stopped in the effective display area is displayed. By once enlarging the display, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the decoration identification information stopped in the effective display area, and to draw the player's line of sight even when a non-specific combination that is essentially meaningless to the player is derived. It can be pinned to the area where the decoration identification information is displayed. Also, when enlarging and displaying the decoration identification information stopped in the effective display area, since the decoration identification information not located in the effective display area is not enlarged and displayed, the player's line of sight can be focused on the decoration identification information stopped in the effective area. In addition, the load of display control can be reduced. Further, even when the decoration identification information to be stopped in the effective display area is enlarged and displayed, the predetermined light emission control is continuously performed, so that the control of the light emission means can be simplified.

[Form 3-1] (No. 4-1)
The game machine of form 3-1 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means can variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform decoration in the effect control process processing of step S76). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
The variable display of the decoration identification information includes front movement display (for example, scroll display) in which the decoration identification information is moved from the depth side toward the front side while increasing transparency and erased (see FIGS. 28 to 30). ,
The decoration identification information includes a character image (for example, character display section 002SG052) and a number image (for example, number display section 002SG051),
While the decoration identification information is displayed moving forward, the other decoration identification information located on the far side with respect to the one decoration identification information becomes visible through the one decoration identification information, and the other decoration identification information is displayed. While the character image of the information is displayed, the number image is not displayed, and after the one decoration identification information is erased, the number image of the other decoration identification information is displayed (for example, FIG. 30). As shown in (A) and (B), one decorative design (for example, decorative design "2") is displayed in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R between frame-in display and frame-out display. Another decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern "3") located on the far side so as to partially overlap with the decorative pattern "2" may be visible through the decorative pattern "2". While the character of the character display portion 002SG052 with the pattern "3" is displayed, the number ("3") of the number display portion 002SG051 becomes difficult to see (or is not displayed), and as shown in FIG. 30(C), The part where the number (“3”) of the number display part 002SG051 of the decoration design “3” is displayed after the decoration design “2” is erased.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the decoration identification information is moved from the back side toward the front side while increasing the transparency and erased, the other decoration identification information located on the back side is displayed. The decoration identification information is visible through the one decoration identification information. At this time, the other decoration identification information located on the back side is displayed with the character image but not with the number image. Since the numeric image of the other decoration identification information is displayed after the one decoration identification information is erased, the numeric image of the one decoration identification information and the numeric image of the other decoration identification information are displayed overlapping each other. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the numeric image of the decoration identification information located on the front side from becoming difficult to understand.

[Form 3-2] (No. 4-2)
The game machine of form 3-2 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means can variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform decoration in the effect control process processing of step S76). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
The variable display of the decoration identification information includes a forward moving display (for example, scroll display) in which the decoration identification information is moved from the near side toward the far side while increasing transparency and erased (see FIGS. 31 and 32). ,
The decoration identification information includes a character image (for example, character display section 002SG052) and a number image (for example, number display section 002SG051),
While the decoration identification information is displayed moving forward, other decoration identification information located on the far side with respect to the one decoration identification information is visible through the one decoration identification information, and the one decoration identification is visible. While the character image of the information is displayed, the number image is not displayed, and after the other decoration identification information is erased, the number image of the one decoration identification information is displayed (for example, FIG. 31). As shown in (G) and (H), in the scroll display, the decorative pattern moves in a curved manner from the front side to the back side, so frame-in display is performed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. After the frame is displayed, another decorative pattern (for example, a decorative pattern) located on the back side so as to partially overlap with one decorative pattern (for example, a decorative pattern "3") is displayed. "2") may be visible through the decorative pattern "3".At this time, while the character of the character display portion 002SG052 of the decorative pattern "2" is displayed, the number ( "2") is a portion that is difficult to see (or is not displayed).Modification 1)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the decoration identification information is moved from the front side toward the back side while increasing the transparency and is erased, the other decoration identification information positioned at the back side with respect to one decoration identification information is displayed. The decoration identification information is visible through the decoration identification information. At this time, the character image of the decoration identification information located on the front side is displayed, but the number image is not displayed. Since the numeric image of one decoration identification information is displayed after the other decoration identification information is erased, the numeric image of the other decoration identification information and the numeric image of the one decoration identification information are displayed overlapping each other. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the numerical image of the other decoration identification information located on the far side from becoming difficult to understand.

[Mode 4] (No. 5)
The game machine of form 5 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
Light emitting means (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means can variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform decoration in the effect control process processing of step S76). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
The variable display of the decoration identification information includes rotating display in which the decoration identification information is rotated to repeatedly display the front side and the back side of the decoration identification information (see FIGS. 33 and 34),
The decoration identification information is in a semi-transparent state during the rotating display, and the decoration identification information is in a non-transparent state when the rotating display is stopped (see FIGS. 33 and 34),
The decoration identification information includes a number image (for example, number display unit 002SG051),
While the numeric image on the front side of the decoration identification information that is in a semi-transmissive state during the rotating display is displayed, the numeric image on the back side is not displayed (see FIG. 34),
During the execution of the variable display of the decoration identification information, predetermined light emission control for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode for a predetermined light emission period is repeatedly performed, and the predetermined light emission control is continued even during the rotating display. (For example, even when the variable display of the decorative pattern is being executed in the high base state, the order of white, blue, and yellow is displayed based on the loop light emission control corresponding to the background pattern (see FIG. 24(B)). A portion where the light emission pattern of may be repeatedly executed.Modified example.Refer to FIG. 44)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the decoration identification information is rotated to display the front side and the back side of the decoration identification information repeatedly, the decoration identification information is in a semi-transparent state, so only the front side of the decoration identification information is displayed. In this case, the numeric image on the front side of the decoration identification information is displayed, but the numeric image on the back side is not displayed. The image and the numeric image on the back side are not displayed overlapping each other, and the numeric image on the front side can be prevented from becoming difficult to understand. Further, since the predetermined light emission control is continuously performed even during the rotating display, the control of the light emitting means can be simplified.

[Mode 5] (No. 6)
The game machine of form 5 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means can variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform decoration in the effect control process processing of step S76). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
The areas in which the decoration identification information is displayed are a first area (for example, the left decorative design display area 5L), a second area (for example, the right decorative design display area 5R), the first area, and the second area. and a third area (for example, the middle decoration design display area 5C) located between
the decoration identification information forming the ready-to-reach state after the ready-to-reach state in which the decoration identification information of the same type is temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area when the specific display result is derived; A specific combination (for example, a predetermined jackpot combination) in which the same type of decoration identification information stops in the third area,
When the reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion image ( For example, the reach line effect display 002SG250) is displayed, and it is possible to execute the reach line suggesting effect to be erased (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 can execute the reach line suggesting effect),
After entering the reach state, the decoration identification information being variably displayed in the third area is transmitted at a first transparency (for example, a first transmittance F1) until the reach line suggestion effect is executed. state, and after executing the reach line suggestion effect, the decoration identification information being variably displayed in the third area is set to a second transparency lower than the first transparency (for example, a second transmittance F2). to make it transparent (see FIG. 52),
After the execution of the reach line suggesting effect, the timing at which the decoration identification information being variably displayed in the third area is set to the second transparency is the timing at which the reach line suggesting image is erased from the third area ( For example, after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is executed, the transmittance (transparency) of the decoration pattern being displayed in the middle decoration design display area 5C is set higher than the first transmittance F1 before the reach line effect display 002SG250 is executed. The timing of setting the second transmittance F2 having a low transmittance (transparency) is the timing after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is erased from the center decoration pattern display area 5C (see FIGS. 50 to 52).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the reach state is reached, the reach line suggestion image is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decoration identification information stopped in the first area and the second area and the decoration identification information being variably displayed in the third area. In addition, at the timing when the reach line suggestion image is erased from the third area, the decoration identification information being variably displayed in the third area becomes the second transparency lower than the first transparency, so that the decoration identification information is being variably displayed in the third area. The decorative identification information does not interfere with the reach line suggestion image.

[Mode 6] (No. 7)
The game machine of form 6 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
a means for emitting light;
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means can variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform decoration in the effect control process processing of step S76). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
The areas in which the decoration identification information is displayed are a first area (for example, the left decorative design display area 5L), a second area (for example, the right decorative design display area 5R), the first area, and the second area. and a third area (for example, the middle decoration design display area 5C) located between
the decoration identification information forming the ready-to-reach state after the ready-to-reach state in which the decoration identification information of the same type is temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area when the specific display result is derived; A specific combination (for example, a predetermined jackpot combination) in which the same type of decoration identification information stops in the third area,
When the reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion image ( For example, the reach line effect display 002SG250) is displayed, and it is possible to execute the reach line suggesting effect to be erased (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 can execute the reach line suggesting effect),
When executing the reach line suggesting effect, enlarged display for enlarging the decoration identification information temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area, and separation display for separating the decoration identification information after executing the enlarged display. and can be executed (see FIGS. 50 to 52),
The second period from the start to the end of the separated display is longer than the first period from the start to the end of the enlarged display (for example, the period from the start to the end of the enlarged display). The second period te1 from the start to the end of the separation display is longer than the first period td1 (td1<te1; see FIG. 52),
The light emitting means includes specific light emitting means (for example, a movable body lamp 9d) arranged around the display means,
It is possible to execute extinguishing control to extinguish the specific light emitting means during execution of the reach line suggestion effect (for example, when changing the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250, the display screen of the image display device 5 Portions for turning off the movable body lamps 9d of the movable bodies 32A and 32B arranged in the periphery (nearby) (see FIGS. 50(F) to (H))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the reach state is reached, the reach line suggestion image is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decoration identification information stopped in the first area and the second area and the decoration identification information being variably displayed in the third area. In addition, the decoration identification information stopped in the first area and the second area is enlarged and displayed for the first period, and then displayed separately for the second period longer than the first period, thereby forming the reach state. The identification information can be recognized by the player. Further, by turning off the specific light-emitting means around the display means, the reach line suggesting image can be made to stand out more.

[Mode 7] (No. 8)
The game machine of form 7 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
a means for emitting light;
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means can variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform decoration in the effect control process processing of step S76). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
The areas in which the decoration identification information is displayed are a first area (for example, the left decorative design display area 5L), a second area (for example, the right decorative design display area 5R), the first area, and the second area. and a third area (for example, the middle decoration design display area 5C) located between
the decoration identification information forming the ready-to-reach state after the ready-to-reach state in which the decoration identification information of the same type is temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area when the specific display result is derived; A specific combination (for example, a predetermined jackpot combination) in which the same type of decoration identification information stops in the third area,
When the reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion image ( For example, the reach line effect display 002SG250) is displayed, and it is possible to execute the reach line suggesting effect to be erased (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 can execute the reach line suggesting effect),
The light emitting means includes specific light emitting means (for example, a movable body lamp 9d) arranged around the display means,
It is possible to execute extinguishing control to extinguish the specific light emitting means during execution of the reach line suggestion effect (for example, when changing the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250, the display screen of the image display device 5 Portions for turning off the movable body lamps 9d of the movable bodies 32A and 32B arranged in the periphery (nearby) (see FIGS. 50(F) to (H))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the reach state is reached, the reach line suggestion image is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decoration identification information stopped in the first area and the second area and the decoration identification information being variably displayed in the third area. In addition, by turning off the specific light emitting means around the display means, the reach line suggestive image can be made to stand out more.

[Mode 8] (No. 9)
The game machine of form 8 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
Light emitting means (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b),
The game control means is
Execute the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
A normal state (for example, low-probability low base state), a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state and a short average variable display period (for example, low-probability high base state or high-probability high base state), is controllable to
The production control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decoration pattern in the effect control process processing of step S76). part),
When the variable display of the decoration identification information is temporarily stopped in the normal state, predetermined operation display control for operating the decoration identification information in a predetermined operation mode is repeatedly performed over a first period (for example, for effect control When the CPU 120 temporarily stops and displays the decorative patterns at the stop positions of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R in the low base state, the loop action of the decorative patterns is repeatedly executed until the variable display of the special patterns is completed. 23(C), 42 and 43),
When the variable display of the decoration identification information is temporarily stopped in the normal state, predetermined light emission control for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode is repeatedly performed over a second period (for example, the effect control CPU 120 3. When the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop positions of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the low base state, loop light emission control of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the movable body lamp 9d is repeatedly executed. 24(B), 42 and 43),
When the variable display of the decoration identification information is stopped in the special state, the predetermined operation display control is not performed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may display the decoration symbols in the high base state in the decoration symbol display areas 5L and 5C). , a part that does not execute the loop action of the decorative pattern when the temporary stop display is made at the stop position of 5R (see FIG. 44),
The second period is longer than the first period (for example, loop action period Tb3<loop light emitting period Tb4; see FIG. 24A)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the normal state, the predetermined operation display control is repeatedly performed in the sense of prompting the player to variably display the decoration identification information. It is possible to prevent the user from feeling annoyed by being urged to do so. Further, since the predetermined operation display control is repeatedly performed at a shorter period than the predetermined light emission control, the decoration identification information can be preferably highlighted.

[Mode 9] (No. 10)
The game machine of form 9 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means is
Execute the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
A normal state (for example, low-probability low base state), a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state and a short average variable display period (for example, low-probability high base state or high-probability high base state), is controllable to
Information relating to the variable display of the special identification information that has not yet started can be stored as pending storage information (for example, the CPU 103 stores the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 in the start winning judgment process of step S101, and the number of pending storage The part that performs the update process),
The production control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decoration pattern in the effect control process processing of step S76). part),
The display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information is composed of combinations of the decoration identification information stopped in the effective display area (for example, "111" stopped and displayed at the stop positions of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, The part that becomes a big hit or loses by combining decorative patterns such as "326"),
In the normal state, when a non-specific combination that is a combination of the decoration identification information corresponding to the non-specific display result other than the specific display result is derived as the display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information, the decoration identification When the information is stopped in the effective display area, the decoration identification information is displayed in an enlarged size from the normal size according to the number of reserved memories stored as the reserved memory information, and then displayed in a mode of returning to the normal size. (For example, when the effect control CPU 120 temporarily stops displaying the decoration pattern, the part that can execute the fluctuation stop action. See FIGS. 36 to 39),
In the special state, when the non-specific combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information, when the decoration identification information is stopped in the effective display area, it is stored as the reserved storage information. Regardless of the number of reserved memories, the decoration identification information is maintained at a normal size (for example, in a high base state where the average variable display period is short and the decorative pattern is difficult to see, regardless of the number of reserved memories When the variable display based on the shortened variation pattern is executed, the portion where the variable stop action is not executed and the temporary stop display is performed while maintaining the size (see FIGS. 39 and 44).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the normal state, the movement when the decoration identification information is stopped is varied according to the number of retained memories to improve interest, while the average variable display period is short and the decoration identification information is visually recognized. In a special state where it is difficult to do so, by stopping while maintaining the size, it is possible to stop so that the visibility of the decoration identification information is not impaired.

[Mode 10] (No. 11)
The game machine of form 10 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means can variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform decoration in the effect control process processing of step S76). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
In one production mode, it is possible to switch and display a plurality of types of background images including the first background image and the second background image (for example, in the first production mode, the background image may be a daytime town seen from a distance). A first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 40(A1)) representing a landscape in the middle of the day and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 40(A2)) representing a townscape in the daytime can be switched and displayed. part),
When the background image is switched from the first background image to the second background image, background fade-out display is performed to gradually increase the transparency of the first background image and erase it, and the background fade-out display of the first background image is performed. is executed, the background fade-in display can be executed by gradually decreasing the transparency of the second background image (for example, the fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A A portion where a cross-fade display synchronized with the fade-in display period B1 of is executed (see FIG. 40),
When the variable display of the decoration identification information is started, it is possible to perform identification information fade-out display in which the transparency of the decoration identification information is gradually increased and erased (for example, the decoration pattern is gradually accelerated after scroll display is started). As the display speed increases, the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and the display fades out),
When ending the variable display of the decoration identification information, it is possible to perform identification information fade-in display in which the transparency of the decoration identification information is gradually lowered (for example, the stop timing of the decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R). approaches, the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R decorative patterns, and the middle decorative pattern display area 5C decorative patterns are gradually decelerated and displayed at a low speed, proportional to the decrease in speed. Then the transmittance (transparency) decreases and the part fades in),
The execution period of the background fade-out display is longer than the execution period of the identification information fade-out display (for example, the fade-out display period A1 during which the fade-out display of the first background image 002SG081 is performed is is longer than the fade-out display period A21 from the start of the scroll display to the high-speed display (fade-out display period A1>fade-out display period A21; see FIGS. 42 and 43).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the fade-out display basically gives the impression that the fade-out display has disappeared abruptly as it is executed in a short period of time. In some cases, the fade-out display of the identification information is executed in a shorter period of time than the fade-out display of the background, so that it can be noted that the variable display of the decoration identification information has started.

[Mode 11] (No. 12)
The game machine of form 11 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means can variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform decoration in the effect control process processing of step S76). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
In one production mode, it is possible to switch and display a plurality of types of background images including the first background image and the second background image (for example, in the first production mode, the background image may be a daytime town seen from a distance). A first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 40(A1)) representing a landscape in the middle of the day and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 40(A2)) representing a townscape in the daytime can be switched and displayed. part),
When the background image is switched from the first background image to the second background image, background fade-out display is performed to gradually increase the transparency of the first background image and erase it, and the background fade-out display of the first background image is performed. is executed, the background fade-in display can be executed by gradually decreasing the transparency of the second background image (for example, the fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A A portion where a cross-fade display synchronized with the fade-in display period B1 of is executed (see FIG. 40),
When the variable display of the decoration identification information is started, it is possible to perform identification information fade-out display in which the transparency of the decoration identification information is gradually increased and erased (for example, the decoration pattern is gradually accelerated after scroll display is started). As the display speed increases, the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and the display fades out),
When ending the variable display of the decoration identification information, it is possible to perform identification information fade-in display in which the transparency of the decoration identification information is gradually lowered (for example, the stop timing of the decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R). approaches, the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R decorative patterns, and the middle decorative pattern display area 5C decorative patterns are gradually decelerated and displayed at a low speed, proportional to the decrease in speed. Then the transmittance (transparency) decreases and the part fades in),
The execution period of the identification information fade-out display is different from the execution period of the background fade-out display (for example, the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-out display period A22 are not executed at the same time; see FIGS. 42 and 43).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by synchronizing the identification information fade-out display and the background fade-out display, it is possible to prevent difficulty in understanding that the variable display of the decoration identification information has started.

[Mode 12] (No. 13)
The game machine of form 12 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means can variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform decoration in the effect control process processing of step S76). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
In one production mode, it is possible to switch and display a plurality of types of background images including the first background image and the second background image (for example, in the first production mode, the background image may be a daytime town seen from a distance). A first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 40(A1)) representing a landscape in the middle of the day and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 40(A2)) representing a townscape in the daytime can be switched and displayed. part),
When the background image is switched from the first background image to the second background image, background fade-out display is performed to gradually increase the transparency of the first background image and erase it, and the background fade-out display of the first background image is performed. is executed, the background fade-in display can be executed by gradually decreasing the transparency of the second background image (for example, the fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A A portion where a cross-fade display synchronized with the fade-in display period B1 of is executed (see FIG. 40),
When the variable display of the decoration identification information is started, it is possible to perform identification information fade-out display in which the transparency of the decoration identification information is gradually increased and erased (for example, the decoration pattern is gradually accelerated after scroll display is started). As the display speed increases, the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and the display fades out),
When ending the variable display of the decoration identification information, it is possible to perform identification information fade-in display in which the transparency of the decoration identification information is gradually lowered (for example, the stop timing of the decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R). approaches, the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R decorative patterns, and the middle decorative pattern display area 5C decorative patterns are gradually decelerated and displayed at a low speed, proportional to the decrease in speed. Then the transmittance (transparency) decreases and the part fades in),
The execution period of the background fade-in display is longer than the execution period of the identification information fade-in display (for example, the fade-in display period B1 during which the fade-in display of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is performed is In the scroll display of 5L, 5C, and 5R, a period longer than the fade-in display period B21 from the start of deceleration of the display speed to the temporary stop display (fade-in display period B1>fade-in display period B21).See FIGS. 42 and 43)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the fade-in display basically gives the impression that the fade-in display is performed in a short period of time, so that the variable display of the decoration identification information and the background change may be performed at the same time. In some cases, it can be noted that the variable display of the decoration identification information ends when the identification information fade-in display is performed in a shorter period of time than the background fade-in display.

[Mode 13] (No. 14)
The game machine of form 13 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means can variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform decoration in the effect control process processing of step S76). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
In one production mode, it is possible to switch and display a plurality of types of background images including the first background image and the second background image (for example, in the first production mode, the background image may be a daytime town seen from a distance). A first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 40(A1)) representing a landscape in the middle of the day and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 40(A2)) representing a townscape in the daytime can be switched and displayed. part),
When the background image is switched from the first background image to the second background image, background fade-out display is performed to gradually increase the transparency of the first background image and erase it, and the background fade-out display of the first background image is performed. is executed, the background fade-in display can be executed by gradually decreasing the transparency of the second background image (for example, the fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A A portion where a cross-fade display synchronized with the fade-in display period B1 of is executed (see FIG. 40),
When the variable display of the decoration identification information is started, it is possible to perform identification information fade-out display in which the transparency of the decoration identification information is gradually increased and erased (for example, the decoration pattern is gradually accelerated after scroll display is started). As the display speed increases, the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and the display fades out),
When ending the variable display of the decoration identification information, it is possible to perform identification information fade-in display in which the transparency of the decoration identification information is gradually lowered (for example, the stop timing of the decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R). approaches, the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R decorative patterns, and the middle decorative pattern display area 5C decorative patterns are gradually decelerated and displayed at a low speed, proportional to the decrease in speed. Then the transmittance (transparency) decreases and the part fades in),
The execution period of the identification information fade-in display is different from the execution period of the background fade-in display (for example, the fade-in display period B1 and the fade-in display period B21 are not executed at the same time. See FIGS. 42 and 43). )
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by synchronizing the identification information fade-in display and the background fade-in display, it is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to understand that the variable display of the decoration identification information ends.

[Mode 14] (No. 15)
The game machine of form 14 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means can variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform decoration in the effect control process processing of step S76). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
After the variable display is temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the decoration identification information until the display result is derived and displayed, it is possible to execute a specific effect of restarting the variable display (for example, The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display is resumed after the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined timing from when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started to when the display result is derived and displayed. , a portion that can execute a “pseudo continuous notice” that incites whether or not to make one variable display look like multiple variable displays in a pseudo manner),
The decoration identification information has decoration identification information of a plurality of colors (for example, blue and red) including a numeric image,
When the variable display is restarted in the specific effect, a number image (for example, pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212) that can specify the number of times the variable display is restarted can be displayed in a plurality of colors (for example, blue and red). (See FIGS. 48 and 49),
In the specific effect, the number image of the temporarily stopped decoration identification pattern and the number display of the number image when the variable display is resumed are of the same type, and the number image of the temporarily stopped decoration identification pattern and the number image are of the same type. When the first combination of different colors is obtained, the number image of the temporarily stopped decoration identification pattern and the number of times when the variable display is restarted, the number image of the temporarily stopped decoration identification pattern, and the number of times There is a case where both colors of the image are the same kind of second combination,
In the specific effect, the ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher when the variable display is restarted with the second combination than when the variable display is restarted with the first combination (for example, a pseudo In the consecutive notice, if the display color of the temporary stop displayed decorative symbol and the pseudo consecutive number display is the first combination of non-same colors, and the temporary stop displayed decorative symbol and the pseudo consecutive number display display color are the same color. There are cases where it becomes the second combination, and when the variable display is resumed with the second combination in the pseudo consecutive notice, the jackpot game state is more likely than when the variable display is resumed with the first combination. part where the controlled rate is high)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention not only to whether or not the specific effect is executed, but also to the combination of numbers and colors of the number image and the number image of the decoration identification information temporarily stopped and displayed when the specific effect is executed. Therefore, the amusement of the game is improved.

[Mode 15] (No. 16)
The game machine of form 15 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The production control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decoration pattern in the effect control process processing of step S76). part),
The size is smaller than the decoration identification information, and it is possible to variably display the reduced identification information corresponding to each of the plurality of types of decoration identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can reduce the size corresponding to the decoration pattern). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
When the variable display is not being executed, it is possible to execute a standby effect that displays a predetermined image (for example, after the effect control CPU 120 receives the customer waiting demonstration designation command output from the main board 11, the variable A portion that can execute a “customer waiting demonstration effect” when a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has passed without receiving a control command such as a display start designation command (see FIG. 46),
When the standby effect is being executed, the display of the reduced identification information is continued while the decoration identification information is hidden (see FIG. 46),
When the condition for starting variable display is satisfied while the standby effect is being executed, the predetermined image is hidden after variable display of the reduced identification information is started before the predetermined image is hidden. After being displayed, the decoration identification information is displayed and the variable display is started (for example, if the start winning occurs while the customer waiting demo effect is being executed, the customer waiting demo effect image 002SG400 is not displayed). The variable display of the small symbols is started before it becomes, then the customer waiting demonstration effect image 002SG400 is hidden, and the background image corresponding to the effect mode at that time (here, the first effect mode corresponding to the first effect mode) is displayed. 1 background image 002SG081), after which the decoration pattern is displayed and the scroll display is started (see FIG. 47)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by starting the variable display of the decoration identification information after the predetermined image is hidden, the player can recognize that the variable display has started in accordance with the fulfillment of the condition for starting the variable display. However, since the variable display of the reduced identification information is started before the predetermined image is hidden, it is possible to ensure the display corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information.

[Mode 16] (No. 17)
The game machine of form 16 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means is
Execute the variable display of the specific identification information based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns (see FIG. 7) (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
A normal state (for example, low-probability low base state), a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state and a short average variable display period (for example, low-probability high base state or high-probability high base state), is controllable to
The production control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information (for example, decoration patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the production control CPU 120 performs decoration in the production control process processing of step S76. The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
It is possible to display a pending display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information that has not yet started (for example, the effect control CPU 120 in the pending display update process of step S161, the first A part that performs processing to display the pending display 002SG101 and the second pending display 002SG102),
The corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information being executed can be displayed in the corresponding display area (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can display the active display area 5F in the pending display update process of step S161. part that performs processing to display active display 002SG103),
Along with the start of variable display of the specific identification information, it is possible to perform a switching display that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a special figure pending storage display area A portion for performing a shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and switched to the active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 25),
As the variable display of the decoration identification information, a movement display (for example, scroll display, see FIG. 21) for moving the decoration identification information, and a mode different from the movement display before starting the movement display. It is possible to perform a preliminary action display (for example, a variable start action, see FIG. 23 (A)),
In the normal state, when the switching display is performed, the preliminary operation display is performed (for example, the first suspension display 002SG101 that was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special figure suspension storage display area 5U is moved and displayed to the active display area 5F, and the scroll display (variable display) of the decoration pattern is not started until the pending shift display period until switching display as the active display 002SG103 ends, and the above-described fluctuation start action is executed. , the part where the scroll display (variable display) of the decoration pattern is started after the pending shift display period ends (see FIGS. 26C to 26F),
Based on the variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means, the variable display of the decoration identification information is executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control process processing of step S76 A part that executes variable display of decorative patterns based on the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11),
The switching display can be performed in common when the variable display is performed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is performed based on the second type of variable display pattern information. (For example, when the production control CPU 120 executes variable display based on the first type of variation pattern specification command (for example, non-reach variation pattern specification command) and the second type of variation pattern specification command (for example , reach variation pattern designation command), and a portion that executes a shift display that switches the first reserved display 002SG101 and the first reserved display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner. reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, along with the start of the variable display of the specific identification information, switching display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display, and during the switching display, the decoration identification information is moved. By performing preliminary operation display that operates in a manner different from display, the period required for switching display can be effectively utilized. In addition, since the pre-operation display is performed when the switching display is performed in the normal state, the average variable display period is longer than in the special state, and when the variable display of the decoration identification information starts in the normal state, which tends to be monotonous. can increase the interest of Also, even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is executed, common switching display is performed, so the number of switching display patterns can be reduced.

[Mode 17] (No. 18)
The game machine of form 17 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means is
Execute the variable display of the specific identification information based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns (see FIG. 7) (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
A normal state (for example, low-probability low base state), a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state and a short average variable display period (for example, low-probability high base state or high-probability high base state), is controllable to
The production control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information (for example, decoration patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the production control CPU 120 performs decoration in the production control process processing of step S76. The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
It is possible to display a pending display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information that has not yet started (for example, the effect control CPU 120 in the pending display update process of step S161, the first A part that performs processing to display the pending display 002SG101 and the second pending display 002SG102),
The corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information being executed can be displayed in the corresponding display area (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can display the active display area 5F in the pending display update process of step S161. part that performs processing to display active display 002SG103),
Along with the start of variable display of the specific identification information, it is possible to perform a switching display that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a special figure pending storage display area A portion for performing a shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and switched to the active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 25),
As the variable display of the decoration identification information, a movement display (for example, scroll display, see FIG. 21) for moving the decoration identification information, and a mode different from the movement display before starting the movement display. It is possible to perform a preliminary action display (for example, a variable start action, see FIG. 23 (A)),
In the normal state, when the switching display is performed, the preliminary action display is performed, and the scroll display is not started until the switching display is completed (for example, the left side in the special figure reservation storage display area 5U The first pending display 002SG101 that was displayed in the first display area from the display area is moved to the active display area 5F, and is displayed by scrolling the decoration pattern until the pending shift display period ends until it is switched and displayed as the active display 002SG103 ( (variable display) is not started, the above-described variable start action is executed, and after the pending shift display period ends, the scroll display (variable display) of the decoration pattern is started. )reference),
Based on the variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means, the variable display of the decoration identification information is executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control process processing of step S76 A part that executes variable display of decorative patterns based on the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11),
The switching display can be performed in common when the variable display is performed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is performed based on the second type of variable display pattern information. (For example, when the production control CPU 120 executes variable display based on the first type of variation pattern specification command (for example, non-reach variation pattern specification command) and the second type of variation pattern specification command (for example , reach variation pattern designation command), and a shift display that switches the first reserved display 002SG101 and the first reserved display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner. reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, along with the start of the variable display of the specific identification information, switching display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display, and during the switching display, the decoration identification information is moved. By performing the pre-operation display in which the decoration identification information is operated in a manner different from the movement display before starting the display, it is possible to effectively utilize the period required for performing the switching display. In addition, since the moving display of the decoration identification information is not started until the switching display ends and the corresponding display is displayed in the corresponding display area, the moving display of the decoration identification information may start before the corresponding display is displayed. It is possible to eliminate the discomfort caused by In addition, since the pre-operation display is performed when the switching display is performed in the normal state, the average variable display period is longer than in the special state, and when the variable display of the decoration identification information starts in the normal state, which tends to be monotonous. can increase the interest of Also, even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is performed, common switching display is performed, so the number of switching display patterns can be reduced.

[Mode 18] (No. 19)
The game machine of form 18 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means is
Execute the variable display of the specific identification information based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns (see FIG. 7) (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
A normal state (for example, low-probability low base state), a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state and a short average variable display period (for example, low-probability high base state or high-probability high base state), is controllable to
The production control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information (for example, decoration patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the production control CPU 120 performs decoration in the production control process processing of step S76. The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
It is possible to display a pending display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information that has not yet started (for example, the effect control CPU 120 in the pending display update process of step S161, the first A part that performs processing to display the pending display 002SG101 and the second pending display 002SG102),
The corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information being executed can be displayed in the corresponding display area (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can display the active display area 5F in the pending display update process of step S161. A part that performs processing to display the active display 002SG103),
Along with the start of variable display of the specific identification information, it is possible to perform a switching display that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a special figure pending storage display area A portion for performing a shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and switched to the active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 25),
As the variable display of the decoration identification information, a movement display (for example, scroll display, see FIG. 21) for moving the decoration identification information, and a mode different from the movement display before starting the movement display. It is possible to perform a preliminary action display (for example, a variable start action, see FIG. 23 (A)),
In the special state, when the switching display is performed, the preliminary action display is performed (for example, the first suspension display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special figure suspension storage display area 5U is moved and displayed to the active display area 5F, and the scroll display (variable display) of the decoration pattern is not started until the pending shift display period until switching display as the active display 002SG103 ends, and the above-described fluctuation start action is executed. , A portion where the scroll display (variable display) of the decoration pattern is started after the pending shift display period ends.Modified example),
Based on the variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means, the variable display of the decoration identification information is executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control process of step S76 A part that executes variable display of decorative patterns based on the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 in the process)

The switching display can be performed in common when the variable display is performed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is performed based on the second type of variable display pattern information. (For example, when the production control CPU 120 executes variable display based on the first type of variation pattern specification command (for example, non-reach variation pattern specification command) and the second type of variation pattern specification command (for example , reach variation pattern designation command), and a portion that executes a shift display that switches the first reserved display 002SG101 and the first reserved display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner. reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, along with the start of the variable display of the specific identification information, switching display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display, and during the switching display, the decoration identification information is moved. By performing preliminary operation display that operates in a manner different from display, the period required for switching display can be effectively utilized. Further, since the pre-operation display is performed while the switching display is being performed in the special state which is more advantageous than the normal state, the start of the variable display of the decoration identification information in the special state can be excited. Also, even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is executed, common switching display is performed, so the number of switching display patterns can be reduced.

[Mode 19] (No. 20)
The game machine of form 19 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means is
Execute the variable display of the specific identification information based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns (see FIG. 7) (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
A normal state (for example, low-probability low base state), a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state and a short average variable display period (for example, low-probability high base state or high-probability high base state), is controllable to
The production control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information (for example, decoration patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the production control CPU 120 performs decoration in the production control process processing of step S76. The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
It is possible to display a pending display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information that has not yet started (for example, the effect control CPU 120 in the pending display update process of step S161, the first A part that performs processing to display the pending display 002SG101 and the second pending display 002SG102),
The corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information being executed can be displayed in the corresponding display area (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can display the active display area 5F in the pending display update process of step S161. A part that performs processing to display the active display 002SG103),
Along with the start of variable display of the specific identification information, it is possible to perform a switching display that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a special figure pending storage display area A portion for performing a shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and switched to the active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 25),
As the variable display of the decoration identification information, a movement display (for example, scroll display, see FIG. 21) for moving the decoration identification information, and a mode different from the movement display before starting the movement display. It is possible to perform a preliminary action display (for example, a variable start action, see FIG. 23 (A)),
In the special state, when the switching display is performed, the preliminary action display is performed, and the movement display is not started until the switching display is completed (for example, the left side in the special figure reservation storage display area 5U The first pending display 002SG101 that was displayed in the first display area from the display area is moved to the active display area 5F, and is displayed by scrolling the decoration pattern until the pending shift display period ends until it is switched and displayed as the active display 002SG103 ( Variable display) is not started, the above-described variable start action is executed, and after the pending shift display period ends, the scroll display (variable display) of the decorative pattern is started.Modified example),
Based on the variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means, the variable display of the decoration identification information is executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control process of step S76 A part that executes variable display of decorative patterns based on the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 in the process)

The switching display can be performed in common when the variable display is performed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is performed based on the second type of variable display pattern information. (For example, when the production control CPU 120 executes variable display based on the first type of variation pattern specification command (for example, non-reach variation pattern specification command) and the second type of variation pattern specification command (for example , reach variation pattern designation command), and a shift display that switches and displays the first pending display 002SG101 and the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner. See Figure 25)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, along with the start of variable display of the specific identification information, switching display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display, and during the switching display, the decoration identification information is moved. By performing the pre-operation display in which the decoration identification information is operated in a manner different from the movement display before starting the display, the period required for the switching display can be effectively utilized. In addition, since the moving display of the decoration identification information does not start until the switching display ends and the corresponding display is displayed in the corresponding display area, the moving display of the decoration identification information may start before the corresponding display is displayed. It is possible to eliminate the discomfort caused by Further, since the pre-operation display is performed while the switching display is being performed in the special state which is more advantageous than the normal state, the start of the variable display of the decoration identification information in the special state can be excited. Also, even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is executed, common switching display is performed, so the number of switching display patterns can be reduced.

[Mode 20] (No. 21)
The game machine of form 20 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The production control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decoration pattern in the effect control process processing of step S76). part),
It is possible to control any one of a plurality of production modes (for example, first production mode to fourth production mode) including a first production mode and a second production mode,
When starting the variable display of the decoration identification information, it is possible to perform a fade-out display in which the transparency of the decoration identification information is gradually increased and erased (for example, the decoration pattern is gradually accelerated after the start of the scroll display). As the display becomes faster, the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and the part where the display fades out),
In the first effect mode, a moving display for moving the decoration identification information is executed as a variable display of the decoration identification information (see FIGS. 20A1 and 20A2),
In the second effect mode, as the variable display of the decoration identification information, a special variable display different in mode from the moving display is executed (see FIGS. 20(B1) and (B2)),
The execution period of the fade-out display when the special variable display is performed in the second effect mode is longer than the execution period of the fade-out display when the moving display is performed in the first effect mode ( For example, a portion (fade-out display period A21<fade-out display period A22 (see FIGS. 45A and 45B))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second effect mode, not only is the aspect of variable display of the decoration identification information different from that in the first effect mode, but also a fade-out from the start of the variable display until the decoration identification information is erased. Since the display period is lengthened, it is possible to draw attention to the decoration identification information for a long period of time.

[Mode 21] (No. 22)
The game machine of form 21 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The production control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decoration pattern in the effect control process processing of step S76). part),
It is possible to control any one of a plurality of production modes (for example, first production mode to fourth production mode) including a first production mode and a second production mode,
When starting the variable display of the decoration identification information, it is possible to perform a fade-out display in which the transparency of the decoration identification information is gradually increased and erased (for example, the decoration pattern is gradually accelerated after the start of the scroll display). As the display becomes faster, the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and the part where the display fades out),
any one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns can be determined as the variable display pattern of the decoration identification information;
The execution period of the fade-out display differs between when the predetermined variable display pattern is determined in the first effect mode and when the predetermined variable display pattern is determined in the second effect mode (for example, the first effect mode 45 (A ) See (B)))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the execution period of the fade-out when the predetermined variable display pattern is determined differs between when the first effect mode is controlled and when the second effect mode is controlled. Since it becomes difficult for the player to predict the display pattern, the amusement of the game is improved.

[Mode 22] (No. 23)
The game machine of form 22 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means can variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform decoration in the effect control process processing of step S76). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
The decoration identification information includes a character image (for example, character display section 002SG052) and a related information image (for example, information display section 002SG053) that is information related to the character of the character image,
The variable display period includes a pre-variable display period from when the condition for starting variable display is established until the decoration identification information starts variable display, and a post-variable display period after the decoration identification information starts variable display. , including (for example, the variable display period of the special design is the pre-variable display period from the start of the variable display of the special design and the small design to the start of the scroll display of the decoration design, and the scroll display of the decoration design and a variable after-display period after is started),
the character image is displayed in the pre-variable display period and the post-variable display period;
After being displayed in the pre-variable display period, the related information image is erased before the start of the post-variable display period (for example, the name of the character displayed in the information display section 002SG053). Related information) is displayed during the pre-variable display period, that is, when the variable start action is being executed, and before the post-variable display period is started, that is, the scroll display of the decoration pattern is started. The portion to be erased before (see FIGS. 23(A) and 26)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can deepen his/her understanding of the character by drawing attention to the related information image before the variable display of the decoration identification information is started, that is, when the display is stopped. Also, by erasing the related information image before the start of the variable display, it is possible to draw attention to the variable display, the advance notice effect, etc., rather than the related information image.

[Mode 23] (No. 24)
The game machine of form 23 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means is
Execute the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
A normal state (for example, low-probability low base state), a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state and a short average variable display period (for example, low-probability high base state or high-probability high base state), is controllable to
The production control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decoration pattern in the effect control process processing of step S76). part),
In the normal state, control to one of a plurality of types of presentation modes including a first presentation mode (for example, first presentation mode) and a second presentation mode (for example, second presentation mode). It is possible (for example, first production mode to fourth production mode. See FIG. 20),
In the special state, it is possible to control the production mode including the third production mode (for example, the third production mode and the fourth production mode),
The decoration identification information includes a character image (for example, character display section 002SG052) and a related information image (for example, information display section 002SG053) that is information related to the character of the character image,
In the first effect mode, decoration identification information is displayed in a manner including the character image and the related information image (see FIG. 26),
In the second presentation mode and the third presentation mode, the decoration identification information is displayed in a manner not including the related information image (see FIGS. 28, 29 and 33).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the first effect mode, by displaying the related information image to make the player pay attention to the related information image, the player can deepen his/her understanding of the character. By erasing the related information image in the 3-effect mode, it is possible to draw attention to the variable display, the advance notice effect, etc., rather than the related information image.

[Mode 24] (No. 25)
The game machine of form 24 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means is
Execute the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
A normal state (for example, low-probability low base state), a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state and a short average variable display period (for example, low-probability high base state or high-probability high base state), is controllable to
The production control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decoration pattern in the effect control process processing of step S76). part),
The decoration identification information includes a numeric image (eg, numeric display unit 002SG061),
When the background image is normally displayed, it is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state will be controlled (for example, the effect control CPU 120 will notify whether or not the big hit will be announced). the part where the production can be executed),
In the notification effect, a specific background image (for example, a fifth background image 002SG085) different from the normal background image is displayed,
When the notification effect is executed in the variable display from which the specific display result is derived as a result of the variable display, decoration identification information corresponding to the specific display result when the specific background image is displayed in the notification effect. is displayed (for example, in the SP reach effect, when the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed as the background image, the combination of the jackpot confirmed symbols (for example, “222”) is temporarily Stopped display (see FIG. 53(F)),
Upon completion of the notification effect, the specific background image is erased and the normal background image is displayed, and when the normal background image is displayed, a combination of decoration identification information corresponding to the specific display result is displayed ( For example, as shown in FIG. 53(G), with the end of the SP ready-to-win effect, the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden and the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, and the first background image 002SG081 is displayed. A part where a combination of jackpot confirmed symbols (for example, "222") is temporarily stopped when there is
a specific image (for example, a specific image 002SG075) is operatively displayed in proximity to the numeric image of the combination of decoration identification information corresponding to the specific display result being displayed while the normal background image is being displayed;
In the special state, the specific image is not displayed (for example, in the low base state, a specific image 002SG075 showing a flame is displayed for the number display portion 002SG051 of the combination of the jackpot confirmed decorative symbols displayed after the end of the SP ready-to-win effect. While the operation is displayed (see FIGS. 53(H) and (I)), in the high base state, flames are emitted to the number display portion 002SG051 of the combination of the jackpot confirmed decoration pattern displayed after the end of the SP ready-to-win effect. 54(P) and (S)) where the specific image 002SG075 shown is not displayed
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in a normal state, the specific image is displayed in motion for the numeric image of the decoration identification information that is displayed after the end of the notification effect, thereby increasing the effect of the effect and making it lively, but the average variable display period is short. In the special state, by not displaying the specific image in response to the numeric image of the decoration identification information displayed after the end of the notification effect, the variable display can be given a sense of speed.

[Form 25] (No. 18-2)
The gaming machine of form 25 is the gaming machine according to form 17 or 18,
The production control means is
When the variable display of the specific identification information ends, the corresponding display (eg, active display 002SG103) corresponding to the variable display displayed in the corresponding display area (eg, active display area 5F) is erased. can display an erasing effect display (for example, erasing effect 002SG110) that emphasizes that the corresponding display has been erased when the
If the suspension display is displayed when the deletion effect display is displayed, the deletion effect display is continuously displayed until the variable display corresponding to the suspension display is started (for example, the deletion effect 002SG110 It continues to be displayed even after the active display 002SG103 is erased, and is erased after the next variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started as follows. (See FIG. 25(B3))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the interest of the presentation from deteriorating by not creating a blank period of the presentation until the next variable display is started after the end of the variable display. In addition, the deletion effect display allows the player to recognize that the corresponding display corresponding to the finished variable display has been erased, and at the same time, displays a new corresponding display to recognize that a new variable display has started. can be made

[Form 26] (No. 18-3)
The gaming machine of form 26 is the gaming machine according to form 17 or 18,
The areas in which the decoration identification information is displayed are a first area (for example, the left decorative design display area 5L), a second area (for example, the right decorative design display area 5R), the first area, and the second area. and a third area (for example, the middle decoration design display area 5C) located between
In the normal state, the decoration identification information is displayed in a smaller size in the third area than in the first area and the second area (see, for example, FIG. 19),
In the special state, the decoration identification information of the first area, the second area and the third area are displayed in the same size (see, for example, FIG. 19),
The third area in the special state is arranged closer to the center of the display area of the display means than the third area in the normal state (see, for example, FIG. 19).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in a normal state, the decoration identification information of the first and second areas are made to appear large, and the decoration identification information of the third area is shifted to give a sense of depth and enhance interest. Also, in a special state in which the average variable display period is short, the decoration identification information is arranged at a position near the center of the display area, so that the degree of recognition of the decoration identification information can be enhanced.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

Next, the form for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on the drawings. In the following, the front side of FIG. 1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko game machine 1, the back side is the rear (rear, rear) side, and the up, down, left, and right directions when the pachinko game machine 1 is viewed from the front side. Described as a standard. Incidentally, the front face of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is the facing face facing the player who plays the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In addition, in the explanation of each step in the flowchart, for example, "step S1" is abbreviated as "S1" or "002SGS1", "normal reach" is "N reach", and "super reach" is "SP reach". It is sometimes abbreviated as

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

The "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Incidentally, the variation includes a mode of blinking a certain symbol. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization is also generically called simply variable display.

In addition, on the upper left of the display screen of the image display device 5, the number corresponding to the first reserved memory number (for example, the number "0" etc.), the second reserved memory number (for example, the number "4" etc.) and the decoration pattern A display area 5S for displaying small patterns is provided, and the small patterns are variably displayed corresponding to the variable display of the decorative patterns.

In addition, the first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, the reserved display, the small pattern, the error display (not shown) indicating the error state that occurred in the pachinko game machine 1, and the right hitting operation that prompts the player to perform the right hitting operation. The notification image 002SG201 (see FIG. 20) and the time saving remaining display 002SG202 (see FIG. 20) indicating the number of remaining time saving are displayed on the front side (upper layer) than the effect image such as the character, so that the effect image While preventing the visibility of the first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, small patterns and error display from being reduced due to overlap, the decorative pattern is deeper than the effect image (lower layer) , it may be possible to prevent the visibility of the effect image from being lowered due to overlapping of the decorative symbols.

Incidentally, the small pattern is also referred to as a fourth pattern. The fourth pattern is a pattern indicating that the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) are displayed variably, for example, in a display device such as the image display device 5. The display changes depending on the movement. By variably displaying the fourth pattern, an effect is performed such that the effect content including the variable display of the decorative pattern disappears from the screen for a moment, or the movable bodies 32A and 32B are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 entirely or Even if it is difficult to recognize the decorative pattern, such as when a part of the pattern is shielded, it is possible to recognize whether or not it is currently in a variable display state. The effect control CPU 120 performs variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol by operating the image display device 5 based on the reception of the first variable display start command. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol by operating the image display device 5 based on the reception of the second variable display start command.

In addition, a fourth pattern display provided at a location other than the image display device 5 (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 which is a predetermined location on the game board 2) such as the first special symbol LED and the second special symbol LED The pattern displayed on the device is also called a fourth pattern.

At the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, a display area (special figure pending storage display area 5U , an active display area 5F). Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display. In addition, in the present embodiment, the common special symbol pending storage display area 5U is provided for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but represents a variable display in which the execution of the first special symbol is suspended. A first special figure pending storage display area in which a first pending display is displayed, and a second special figure pending storage display area in which a second pending display representing a variable display in which the execution of the second special symbol is suspended is displayed. , may be provided separately.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, a first suspension indicator 25A and a second suspension indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first pending display 25A displays the first pending memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second pending display 25B displays the number of second pending memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric accessory having a movable piece that can be opened and closed, and when the solenoid 81 is in an OFF state, the movable piece is in the upright position, thereby causing the game ball to enter the second starting winning hole. It will be in a closed state that does not enter (it is also said that the second start winning opening is in a closed state). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start winning opening) by tilting the movable piece when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state. It is said that the mouth is open.) When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the above as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state.

Predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three positions on the lower left side of the game area and one position above the variable winning ball device 6B) are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning gate door is in the ON state, the big winning gate door opens the big winning gate, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big winning gate. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left lower part of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Below the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstructing nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the frame 3 for a game machine. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the game machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. As shown in FIG.

Movable bodies 32A and 32B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2 (upper and lower positions of the image display device 5 in FIG. 1). A movable body lamp 9d is provided on the movable bodies 32A and 32B. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c are collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9 in some cases. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d include LEDs.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area by the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout portion (hit ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern winning pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern winning". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern lost pattern) other than the normal pattern winning pattern is stop-displayed as the fixed normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern lost". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during execution of the special game or the period when it is controlled to the jackpot game state described later (starting winning occurs, but it is based on the starting winning If the special game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, when a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol varies depending on the type of the big hit to be described later) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a big winning symbol. If a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc.) are prepared, and the jackpot type is set according to these It is As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when the system is reset) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

Incidentally, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting and extinguishing, the movement of the movable bodies 32A and 32B, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the image display device 5, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) is a "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of the ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special game is "lost", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" (Also referred to as non-reach lost") may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach lost"). In addition, when the display result is "lost", after the mode of variable display of decorative patterns becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of variable display of decorative patterns is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("no reach") that is not a big hit combination. ”) is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes “reach lost”).

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, and a launch control substrate are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 . Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but are also configured to implement specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards. It is a concept that includes an electronic circuit mounting board that has been manufactured.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17 , and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an alternating current power supply such as AC 100 V in an external power supply such as a commercial power supply is switched to the power supply board 17 . It can be supplied to electrical parts including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 from the. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (eg, 12 V DC or 5 V DC), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 , an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 and a real-time clock 106 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switch 23) (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 takes in a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either the power supply monitoring circuit, the IC with built-in watchdog timer, or the system reset IC. I wish I had. The power-off signal turns off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

The output circuit 111 outputs a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door. transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable bodies 32A and 32B, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . It also performs display processing for outputting the image data of the display image creation area of the VRAM area designated by the display register as a video signal. In this embodiment, the display image creation area and the drawing area are switched for each V blank. Therefore, the area assigned as the drawing area is drawn in a certain V blank, and the area is switched to the display image creation area in the next V blank, so that the image data drawn in the previous V blank is displayed and output. As a result, drawing is performed in the other area during that time.

In addition, since the display control unit 123 superimposes (combines) a plurality of layers to generate an image to be displayed on the image display device 5, the image of each layer is drawn and stored in the VRAM area. a layer image drawing area for arranging, a display image creating area for generating an image to be displayed on the image display device 5 by superimposing (compositing) the images drawn and arranged in each layer image drawing area, and are placed. Note that each layer has a concept of upper, middle, and lower layers, and an image in a higher layer is given a higher display priority in the image display device 5, and an image in a lower layer is given a higher display priority in the image display device 5. is set low.

The VRAM area has a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging layer 1 images, a layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and arranging layer 2 images, and a layer for drawing and arranging layer 3 images. 3 image drawing areas are arranged. A displacement image creation area for creating a displacement image and a display image creation area are also arranged in the VRAM area.

The displacement image creation area creates an image obtained by superimposing (synthesizing) the image drawn/arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and the image drawn/arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area as an image to be displaced. This is an area in which a displacement image is created by applying a displacement image to the displacement target image.

The display image creation area superimposes ( Display for displaying on the image display device 5 an image synthesized), or an image obtained by superimposing (synthesizing) an image drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area and a displacement image created in the displacement image creation area. This is the area to be created as an image for use.

The image drawn/arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area is the image with the highest display priority in the image display device 5 (display priority: high), and the image drawn/arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area is image display. An image with a lower display priority (display priority: medium) than an image drawn/arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area in the device 5 and an image drawn/arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area have the highest priority in the image display device 5 . Each image is set to an image with a low display priority (display priority: low). That is, layer 1 is a higher layer with the highest image display priority, layer 2 is a middle layer with a lower image display priority than layer 1, and layer 3 is a lower layer with the lowest image display priority. layer.

The layer 1 image drawing area is the lower part of the display area of the image display device 5. The first special figure reservation storage display area 5U that displays the number of first special figure reservation storage and the number of second special figure reservation storage so that it can be specified. A drawing area for drawing an interface image and a second interface image including a small pattern whose display area is smaller than the decoration pattern and a display of the number of retained memories in the upper left part of the display area of the image display device 5. be.

The layer 2 image drawing area is a drawing area in which the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are drawn in order to perform variable display of the decorative patterns in the central portion of the display region of the image display device 5 .

The layer 3 image drawing area is a drawing area in which a background image is drawn in order to display the background image over the entire display area of the image display device 5 .

In this embodiment, an image drawn/arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area (layer 1 image), an image drawn/arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area (layer 2 image), and a layer 3 image drawing area An image to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 can be generated by superimposing each of the images (images of layer 3) drawn and arranged in . In particular, as described above, the images drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area (the first interface image and the second interface image) are set to have the highest display priority. The image (decorative pattern) displayed as an image and drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area has a lower display priority than the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area. The image (background image) drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area is displayed as a low layer image on the image display device 5 because the lowest display priority is set.

In the present embodiment, the images drawn and arranged in each image drawing area have a transmittance (transparency) in order to make the overlapping portion of the upper layer image invisible to the player when superimposed on the lower layer image. is set to 0%, but the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the situation, the transmittance (transparency) of the image drawn/arranged in each image drawing area may be set higher than 0%. However, an image that is transparently displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 or an image that is temporarily hidden may be provided.

The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . In addition, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable bodies 32A and 32B to the movable bodies 32A and 32B or a drive circuit for driving the movable bodies 32A and 32B.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that sound output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable bodies 32A and 32B (supply of signals to operate the movable bodies 32A and 32B, etc.) are for effect control. It may be executed by the CPU 120 .

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

FIG. 3A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "0", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command form shown in FIG. 3A is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 3A, the command 8001H is a first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a design (also referred to as a production design). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special design or a decorative design. In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. , Different EXT data are set according to the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types the jackpot type should be set when the variable display result is "big hit".

Among the variable display result specifying commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 3B, command 8C00H is a first variable display result specifying command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "unprobable variable big hit".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command that designates stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is the time saving control. It is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, short working time state) in which probability variation control is not performed while it is performed. In addition, the command 9502H is the third game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high probability high base state, time reduction with probability variation state) in which both time saving control and probability variation control are performed. In addition, the probability variation state with time saving may simply be referred to as "probability variation state".

The command A0XXH is a win start specifying command (also called a "fanfare command") specifying display of an effect image indicating the start of a big win game. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the big winning opening to notify that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state. The command A3XXH is a win end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the big win game.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, for example, different EXT data is set corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the jackpot state described later (for example, "0" to "10"). .

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure reserved storage number. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure pending storage number. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

Note that the commands shown in FIG. 3A are only examples, and some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, and these commands may be replaced with different commands. You can add different commands from For example, a prize ball number notification command for specifying the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball entering each prize hole, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. You may make it provide the notification command etc. which notify the notification command of passing, and the remaining variable display frequency by which probability variation control and time saving control are performed.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 4, on the side of the main board 11, a random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, a random number MR2 for big hit type determination, a random number MR3 for variation pattern determination, and a normal figure display result determination Numerical data representing each of the random numbers MR4 is controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data representing part or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. For example, the CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown), to update various numerical data by software, thereby setting the random numbers MR1 to MR4. You may make it count the numerical data which show a part.

The random number MR1 for special figure display result determination is a random number used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as the special figure in the special figure game as "big win" to the big win game state. It takes a value in the range from "0" to "65536". The random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is any one of "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", "variable jackpot C", and "variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". It is a random value used to determine , and takes a value in the range of "0" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine one of a plurality of types prepared in advance for the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. 997”.

The random number MR4 for judging the result of normal pattern display is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal pattern display device 20 in the normal pattern display is "win" or "lose". It is a random number that can be set, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 5 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. As shown in FIG. In this embodiment, as the display result determination table, a common display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special figure Separate display result determination tables may be used for the figure and the second special figure.

The display result determination table is determined to be a variable display result in a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referred to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a "jackpot" to a jackpot game state based on the random number MR1 for judging the special symbol display result. is a table.

In the display result determination table, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a variable probability state (high probability state), random for special figure display result judgment A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the numerical value MR1 is assigned to a special figure display result of "big win" or "losing".

In the display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is the determination result of whether or not to control the special figure display result as "big win" to the big win game state. It is data for judgment to be assigned. In the display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), "big hit" special figure display result assigned to. As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) in which the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, compared to the determined probability (approximately 1/300 in the present embodiment), the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as "jackpot" to the jackpot game state becomes higher (approximately 1 in the present embodiment /30). That is, in the display result determination table, when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is the probability variable state (high probability state), the probability of determining to control to the jackpot game state compared to the normal state or the time-saving state is higher. Judgment data is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so as to increase.

FIG. 6A shows a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The jackpot type determination table in the present embodiment, when it is determined to control the special figure display result as "jackpot" to the jackpot game state, based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, the jackpot type can be any of a plurality of types. It is a table that is referenced to determine whether In the big hit type determination table, the special symbol for which variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second 2 special symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is "non-probability variable jackpot", "probability variable jackpot A", " It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots, such as "probability variable big hit B" and "probability variable big hit C".

Here, the jackpot type in the present embodiment will be described using FIG. "Probability variable jackpot A", "probability variable jackpot B", "probability variable jackpot C" that shifts to a high probability high base state, and only time-saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state to shift to a low probability high base state " Non-probability variable jackpot" is set.

The jackpot game state by the "probability variable jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, the big-hit game state by the "probability variable big-hit B" is a normal opening big-hit in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. . The big win game state by the "probability variable big win C" is a normal open big win in which two rounds (so-called two rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. In addition, the jackpot game state by the ``non-probable variable jackpot'' is a normal open jackpot in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. . Therefore, "variable big hit A" is called 10 rounds (10R) big hit, "variable big hit B" is called 5 rounds (5R) big hit, and "variable big hit C" is called 2 rounds (2R) big hit. may be called.

The variable probability control and the time saving control, which are started after the end of the jackpot game state of the variable probability big win A to the variable probability big win C, are ended on the condition that the game state is controlled to the big win game state. In addition, the time saving control started after the end of the jackpot game state of the non-probability variable jackpot is controlled to the jackpot game state by the end of the variable display of 100 times or by the end of the variable display of the 100 times. terminated on the condition that Therefore, when the reoccurring big win is one of the variable probability big win A to variable probability big win C, the variable probability control and the time saving control are executed again after the big win game state is ended, so that the big win game state passes through the normal state. It becomes a so-called continuous state, which occurs continuously without In other words, the variable probability state in the present embodiment is a game state that continues until the variable display result becomes a big hit regardless of the number of variable display times, while the time saving state in the present embodiment is a game state in which the variable display result does not become a big hit. If not, it is a game state controlled to a normal state by executing variable display 100 times. For this reason, the time-saving state is also a game state that is controlled when the consecutive game state can end.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. B", "probability variable jackpot C", and "non-probability variable jackpot" are assigned different determination values for the jackpot types. That is, if the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (the value in the range of "81" to "100") has a small number of rounds "variable hit B" or "variable probability While assigned to the jackpot type of "jackpot C", when the special figure displayed variably is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. , the ratio of determining the jackpot type to the "probability variable big hit B" or "probability variable big hit C" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special game using the second special figure, the jackpot type is not determined to be controlled to a big hit state with a small number of rounds as "probable variable big hit B" or "probable variable big hit C". In a game state in which game balls are likely to enter the second starting winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by the high opening control, the frequent occurrence of a big win state with few winning balls is avoided and the interest in the game is reduced. It is designed to prevent this from happening.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 6(A), the assignment of the determination value to the "non-variable" jackpot type is the first special figure game or the second special figure Since it is the same regardless of whether it is a non-probable jackpot or a definite jackpot, it is the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. ing.

Therefore, as described above, depending on whether the allocation of the determination value for "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C" is different depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or a second special figure In addition, the assignment of the judgment value to the "probable variable jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is set to be easier to determine in the case of the special game of the special figure than in the case of the first special figure of the special game.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special game of the first special figure is the "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C". You may make it assign to a classification. For example, in the case of the special game of the second special, the judgment value less than that of the special game of the first special is the big hit type of "probable variable big hit B" or "probable variable big hit C". may be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether the game is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 7 shows variation patterns in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "missing", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to the case where the display result is a "big hit". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "lost" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. Although one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. In addition, in the present embodiment, three types of variation patterns are provided as super reach variation patterns: super reach (no pseudo run), super reach (one pseudo run), and super reach (two pseudo runs). The present invention is not limited to this, and four or more or two or less super reach fluctuation patterns may be provided.

In addition, the super reach variation pattern in the present embodiment is a variation pattern (PA2-2) that deviates from the variation pattern (PB1-2) in which the variable display result is a big hit as a variation pattern of super reach (no pseudo run), As a variation pattern of super reach (1 pseudo-run), the variation pattern (PB1-3) where the variable display result is a big hit and a variation pattern (PA2-3) that is out of step, as a variation pattern of super reach (2 pseudo-runs) There are provided a variation pattern (PB1-4) in which the variable display result is a big hit, and a variation pattern (PA2-4) in which the result is not.

As shown in FIG. 7, the special figure variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach production of the normal reach in the present embodiment is executed is set shorter than the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, in the present embodiment, since the variable display result is set in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach so that the degree of expectation for a big hit becomes "big hit", in the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern The longer the special figure fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

Further, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, these variation patterns are determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. , For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random value for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and the type of variation pattern is first determined from the random value for determining the type of variation pattern, and then the A variation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram of a method of determining a variation pattern according to this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is changed according to the display result of the variable display to be executed, the number of reserved memories, the game state, and the like.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, when the variable display result is a non-probable variable big hit, the big hit variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern is determined using the big win variation pattern determination table A. -1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of super reach (no pseudo consecutive effect) jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern of super reach (one pseudo consecutive effect) jackpot), PB1-4 (super reach (twice pseudo-continuous effect) big hit variation pattern). More specifically, in the big hit variation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, and PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 35%. , PB1-4 at a rate of 40%.

Also, if the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot A to C, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table B to set the variation pattern to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot variation pattern ), PB1-2 (super reach (no pseudo-continuous effect) big hit variation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach (pseudo-continuous effect 1 time) big hit variation pattern), PB1-4 (super reach (pseudo-continuous effect 2) It is determined from the number of times) variation pattern of the jackpot). More specifically, in the big hit variation pattern determination table B, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 10%, PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 20%, and PB1-4 is determined at a rate of 70%. .

Also, if the game state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a loss, and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 1 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for loss, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table A, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-1 (no shortening non-reach fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach loss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo continuous effect) fluctuation pattern ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach (one pseudo-continuous effect)), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach (twice pseudo-continuous effect)). More specifically, in the variation pattern determination table for deviation A, PA1-1 is determined at a rate of 50%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 40%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 5%. , PA2-3 in a proportion of 3% and PA2-4 in a proportion of 2%.

In addition, if the game state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a loss, and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 2, select the variation pattern determination table B for loss, Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss), PA2-1 (normal reach loss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo continuous effect) loss variation pattern), It is determined from PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach (one pseudo-continuous effect)) and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach (twice pseudo-continuous effect)). More specifically, in the variation pattern determination table for deviation B, PA1-2 is determined at a rate of 60%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 5%. , PA2-3 in a proportion of 3% and PA2-4 in a proportion of 2%.

In addition, when the game state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a loss, and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 3, the variation pattern determination table C for loss is selected, Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss), PA2-1 (normal reach loss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo continuous effect) loss fluctuation pattern), It is determined from PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach (one pseudo-continuous effect)) and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach (twice pseudo-continuous effect)). More specifically, in the deviation variation pattern determination table C, PA1-3 is determined at a rate of 70%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 20%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 5%. , PA2-3 in a proportion of 3% and PA2-4 in a proportion of 2%.

Also, if the gaming state is a high base state (time saving state or probability variable state), select the variation pattern determination table D for loss, and change the variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table D for loss PA1-3 (shortened Variation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (normal reach loss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo continuous effect) loss variation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (simulated continuous effect 1 time) fluctuation pattern) and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach (twice pseudo continuous effect)). More specifically, in the variation pattern determination table for deviation C, PA1-3 is determined at a rate of 80%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 10%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 5%. , PA2-3 in a proportion of 3% and PA2-4 in a proportion of 2%.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variable display result is a big hit, the variation pattern is determined according to the type of the big win. The selection ratio of any one of the variation patterns for big wins (PB1-1 to PB1-4) may be varied according to, for example, the gaming state, regardless of the type of the big win. By doing so, the variable display is performed in a variation pattern suitable for the game state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, the contents of part or all of the RAM 102 are preserved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power). be. In particular, at least data (such as a special process flag) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the game is restored after a power failure or the like. Data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

The RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 002SG150 as shown in FIG. there is The game control data holding area 002SG150 shown in FIG. It has a control timer setting section 002SG153, a game control counter setting section 002SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 002SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 002SG151A is a special feature that has not yet started although the game ball passes (enters) the first start prize opening formed by the prize ball device 6A and the start prize (first start prize) has occurred. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) are stored in order of winning.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit 002SG151B, although the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the start winning (second starting winning) has occurred, it has not started yet. The reserved data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) are stored in the winning order.

As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 002SG151A is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Numerical data indicating random number MR1 for variable display result determination, random number MR2 for hit type determination, and random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on establishment is held data, It stores until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). In addition, the second special figure reservation storage unit 002SG151B is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), and the establishment of the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Numerical data representing the random number MR1 for variable display result determination, the random number MR2 for winning type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on is reserved data. It stores until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

In this way, the suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit 002SG151A and the second special figure suspension storage unit 002SG151B can be used to execute a special figure game using the first special figure or a special figure game using the second special figure. It shows that it is suspended, and it becomes suspension information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit based on the variable display result (special figure display result) in these special figure games.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning hole in this way, and the second starting winning hole When the holding information (second holding information) based on the establishment of the second start winning by the game ball passing (entering) is stored in association with the holding number in a separate holding storage unit, The variable display based on the second reserved storage information is preferentially executed over the variable display based on the first reserved information.

The normal pattern pending storage unit 002SG151C stores the pending information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball is detected by the gate switch 21 . For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit 002SG151C associates the game ball with the reservation number in the order in which it was detected by the gate switch 21, and the general pattern display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for determination is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 002SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 or the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 002SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 002SG153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG. For example, the game control timer setting unit 002SG153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 002SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit 002SG154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 002SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update it by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 002SG154, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data representing the random numbers MR1 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103, Numerical data representing each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 002SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit 002SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling the production operation in addition to the production control program. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables prepared for the performance control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, pattern data that constitutes various performance control patterns, and the like. there is

As an example, in the ROM 121, the production control CPU 120 controls production operations by various production devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9, the decorative LED, the production model, etc.). A performance control pattern table storing a plurality of types of performance control patterns to be used is stored. The performance control pattern corresponds to various performance operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is composed of data indicating the content of the control. The effect control pattern table may store, for example, a special figure variable display time effect control pattern, a notice effect control pattern, various effect control patterns, and the like.

In the RAM 122 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. 2, a production control data holding area 002SG190 as shown in FIG. is provided. The production control data holding area 002SG190 shown in FIG. 10A includes a production control flag setting unit 002SG191, a production control timer setting unit 002SG192, a production control counter setting unit 002SG193, and a production control buffer setting unit 002SG194. there is

The effect control flag setting unit 002SG191 stores a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example. is flagged. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 002SG191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 002SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 002SG192 stores data indicating the timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting unit 002SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 002SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 002SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 002SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the data constituting the reception command buffer 002SG194A at the time of start winning as shown in FIG. In the start winning command buffer 002SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory Corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, in the start winning command buffer 002SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4 ”) and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”). When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, the start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command) and the pending memory number notification command (second 1 pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the reception command buffer 002SG194A at the time of start winning are associated with these starting entrance winning designation command and reservation storage number notification command , A storage area (entry) for storing separately in the first special figure reservation storage and the second special figure reservation storage is secured.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. , and the storage contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in the variable display. It is designed to be cleared in the waiting process per special figure that is executed when ending the.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening from the beginning (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer 002SG194A at the time of starting winning. Then, at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer 002SG194A at the time of starting winning. go. At the time of starting winning, from the starting opening winning designation command to the reservation storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, if the command is received, the starting entrance winning designation command , the pending storage number notification command.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 002SG194A shown in FIG. 10B is an entry (buffer number " 1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry (buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") corresponding to the pending storage of the starting variable display is deleted. , and the storage contents of the entries after the pending storage of the starting variable display are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 10(B), when the variable display of the decoration pattern in the first special figure reserved memory is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number "0" is deleted. ' are shifted to the buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer number "0". , the commands stored in areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 11, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, for example, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in an ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the restoration condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery condition can be established.

If the restoration condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the random number circuit setting process (step S8) is executed after the restoration process (step S4) is executed. The work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 by the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state when the power supply is stopped can be restored. It is sufficient if the pattern variation can be restarted.

If the restoration condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the random number circuit setting process (step S8) is executed after the initialization process (step S6). The initialization processing in step S6 includes clear processing for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear processing.

After executing the random number circuit setting process (step S8), the CPU 103 sets the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 12 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, so that the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port through the switch circuit 110, and It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, execution and suspension management of the special symbol game, control of the jackpot game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

(Special pattern process processing)
FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 12 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting prize determination process, the process of detecting the occurrence of the starting prize, storing pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of pending memories is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of starting winning set to be transmitted in this manner is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S117) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit" and the type of the big hit in the case of a "big hit" are determined by the display result. is determined (predetermined) before is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, in the present embodiment, the special game using the second special is preferentially executed over the special game using the first special. ). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of a plurality of variation patterns using a random number value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination of whether or not the display result is a "big hit". It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". When the display result is "missing", when it is controlled to the time saving state or the variable probability state, and when the end of the number of cuts is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting a round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is a "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit execution count, and a jackpot gaming state when the upper limit execution count is reached. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot opening post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

(Start winning judgment process)
FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing the starting winning determination process (S101) shown in FIG. In the starting winning judgment process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. (002SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (002SGS101; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not "4" as the upper limit storage number is reached (002SGS102). CPU103, for example by reading the 1st reservation memory number count value which is the storage value of the 1st reservation memory number counter provided in game control counter setting section 002SG154, it should have specified the number of the 1st special figure reservation memory. 002SGS102 When the number of first special figure pending storage is not the upper limit (002SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 002SG155 is set to "0" (002SGS103) .

When the first starting port switch 22A is off in 002SGS101 (002SGS101; N), and when the number of first special figure reserved storage reaches the upper limit in 002SGS102 (002SGS102; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by , it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is ON (002SGS104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (002SGS104; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not "4" as the upper limit storage number is reached (002SGS105). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value which is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 002SG154, it is sufficient if it can specify the number of second special figure reservation memory. In 002SGS105, when the number of second special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (002SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 002SG155 is set to "2" (002SGS106) .

After executing either of the processes of 002SGS103 and 002SGS106, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated so as to add 1 (002SGS107). For example, when the starting buffer value is "0", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (002SGS108). For example, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 002SG154, may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the processing of 002SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 002SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for the fluctuation pattern determination and the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern are extracted (002SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this way and the starting port buffer value are stored by being set as suspension information at the beginning of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit (002SGS110).

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of the big hit determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit", and whether or not the variable display result is determined. It is used to determine the jackpot type in the case of "jackpot". The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of 002SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the result of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of 002SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (002SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "0", the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. 12 for transmitting the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The start opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. be done.

CPU103, following the processing of 002SGS111, for example by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, to the effect control board 12 Settings are made for sending the pending storage count notification command (002SGS113). The reserved memory number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. be done.

After executing the process of 002SGS113, it is determined whether or not the start buffer value is "0" (002SGS114). At this time, if the start buffer value is "0" (Y at 002SGS114), the start buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (002SGS115), and then the process proceeds to 2390SGS104. On the other hand, when the start buffer value is "2" (N at 002SGS114), the start buffer is cleared, and after initializing the stored value to "0" (002SGS116), the start winning process is executed. finish. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

(Special pattern normal processing)
FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 13 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 15, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol pending storage number is "0" (step 002SGS141). The number of second special symbol pending storage is the number of pending storage of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 002 SGS141, it is sufficient to read out the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting section and determine whether or not the read value is "0".

In step 002SGS141, when the second special figure pending storage number is other than "0" (step 002SGS141; N), the pending data stored corresponding to the pending number "0" in the second special figure pending storage unit Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for big hit type determination, and random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are read out (step 002 SGS142). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a variable random number buffer.

Subsequent to the processing of step 002 SGS142, by subtracting 1 from the second special figure reserved memory number count value and the total reserved memory number count value and updating it, subtract 1 from the second special figure reserved memory number and the total reserved memory number Update so as to allow, and update the data of the second special figure reservation storage unit. Specifically, the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "0" in the second special figure reservation storage unit (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") are shown. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 002 SGS143).

Then, after updating the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer to "2" (step 002SGS144), it moves to step 002SGS149.

On the other hand, at step 002SGS141, when the second special figure pending memory number is "0" (step 002SGS141; Y), it is determined whether or not the first special figure pending memory number is "0" (step 002SGS145). . The number of the first special figure reserved memory is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 002 SGS145, if the game control counter setting unit reads the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter and determines whether or not the read value is "0" good. Thus, the processing of step 002SGS145 is executed when it is determined that the second special figure pending storage number is "0" at step 002SGS141, and the first special figure pending storage number is "0". Determine whether or not As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

In addition, the special game using the second special figure is not limited to being executed with priority over the special game using the first special figure. Execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and the starting prize is generated. In this case, a table is provided for storing data capable of specifying the order in which the starting prizes are generated, and execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It should be possible to determine whether

When the first special figure pending storage number is other than "0" at step 002SGS145 (step 002SGS145; N), the pending data stored corresponding to the pending number "0" in the first special figure pending storage unit As such, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for big hit type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are read out (step 002 SGS146). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a variable random number buffer.

Subsequent to the processing of step 002 SGS146, by subtracting 1 from the first special figure reserved memory number count value and the total reserved memory number count value and updating it, subtract 1 from the first special figure reserved memory number and the total reserved memory number Update so as to allow, and update the data in the first special figure reservation storage unit. Specifically, the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "0" in the first special figure reservation storage unit (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") are shown. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 002 SGS147).

Then, after updating the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer to "0" (step 002SGS148), it moves to step 002SGS149.

In step 002 SGS 149, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 5 is selected as a table used for determining whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, should be a "jackpot" or a "lose". to set. Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special figure display result of "big hit" or "loss" , determines whether the special figure display result is a "jackpot" or "loss" (step 002 SGS150). In addition, in this step 002 SGS150, if the gaming state at that time is a high probability state (variable probability state) in which the variable probability flag is on, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination is a high probability state (variable probability state ), it is determined as a “big hit” if it falls within the range of 10000 to 12180, and if not, it is determined as a “loss”. Also, if the probability variation flag is off low probability state (low probability low base state if this characteristic part), if the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination falls within the range of 1 to 219, "big hit ”, and if not applicable, it is determined as “missing”.

As described above, in the display result determination table selected at step 002SGS149, different determination values are assigned to the "big hit" corresponding to the game state (high probability, low probability) at that time, so step 002SGS150 In the processing, depending on whether the gaming state when the variable display of the special game or the like is started is a high-probability state, different determination data (determination value) is used to determine the special figure display result as a "big hit" By determining whether or not, when the gaming state is a high probability state, it is determined (determined) as a “jackpot” with a higher probability than when it is a low probability state.

When it is judged to be a "jackpot" at step 002SGS150 (step 002SGS150; Y), the jackpot flag is turned on (step 002SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 6(A) is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of jackpot types (step 002 SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer, and "non-probability variable jackpot", "probability variable jackpot" in the jackpot type determination table A”, “probability variable jackpot B”, “probability variable jackpot C”, which of the judgment values assigned to each jackpot type matches, determines which of a plurality of jackpot types should be selected (step 002 SGS 154 ).

By determining the jackpot type in the processing of step 002 SGS154, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state is changed to a time-saving state (low probability high base state) and a probability variable state ( Which game state is to be controlled from among the high-probability-high base state) is determined before deriving the fixed special symbol as a variable display result. Corresponding to the determined jackpot type, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value, which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (step 002 SGS155), the determined jackpot type Remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probable variable big hit" corresponding to non-probable variable big hit, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", and if it is "probable variable A" corresponding to probability variable big hit A, it is set to "0". If it is "probability variable B" corresponding to B, it is set to "2", and if it is "probability variable C" corresponding to probability variable big hit C, it is set to "3". After the processing of step 002SGS155, the process proceeds to step 002SGS156.

Further, when it is determined to be "missed" at step 002SGS150 (step 002SGS150; N), the processing of step 002SGS156 is executed without executing the processing of steps 002SGS152 to 002SGS155.

In step 002 SGS156, the CPU 103 corresponds to the result of prior determination of whether or not to control to the jackpot game state (whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on), and the decision result of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot game state. , Set a fixed special pattern. As an example, in response to the pre-determined result that the special figure display result is to be "missed", a special symbol indicating a sign of "-", which is a lost symbol, is set as a fixed special symbol. Also, when it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" at step 002 SGS 150a, if the big hit type at step 002 SGS 154 is "probability variable big hit A", a special symbol showing the number "7" is displayed. Set as a fixed special pattern. In addition, when the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B", a special symbol indicating the number "5" is set as the fixed special symbol. In addition, when the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot", a special symbol indicating the number "3" is set as a fixed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C", a special symbol indicating the number "0" is set as the fixed special symbol. Incidentally, these confirmed special symbols are examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or a plurality of kinds of symbols may be set as the confirmed special symbols.

After setting the fixed special symbol in step 002SGS156, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "1" corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step 002SGS157), the special symbol normal process is terminated. .

It should be noted that when the reserved memory number of the special game using the first special figure in step 002SGS145 is "0" (step 002SGS145; Y), after performing a predetermined demonstration display setting (step 002SGS158), End the special symbol normal process. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is transmitted from the main board 11 to effect control. It is determined whether or not the transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if the customer waiting demonstration specifying command has already been transmitted, the demonstration display setting is finished as it is. On the other hand, if the command has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is completed.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 16 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit).

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32A. , 32B, and control to operate various production devices. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. Furthermore, after the effect random value update process (step S77), a demonstration effect control process (step S78) for executing a demonstration effect in the pachinko game machine 1 and a background image displayed on the image display device 5 are changed. A background display update process (step S79) for updating to another background image and a menu display process (step S80) for displaying a menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state are executed. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

Incidentally, in the background display update process of the present embodiment, the first background image corresponding to the first effect mode, the second background image corresponding to the second effect mode, and the third background image corresponding to the third effect mode , and a fourth background image corresponding to the fourth effect mode. The first background image and the second background image can be displayed when the game state is the normal state, the third background image can be displayed when the game state is the low probability/high base state, and the third background image can be displayed when the game state is the low probability/high base state. 4 The background image can be displayed when the game state is the high-probability-high base state. Switching between the first background image and the second background image is performed, for example, when the variable display of SP reach swelling is executed, or when one of the background images is continuously displayed for a predetermined period of time. It switches when the conditions are met.

In the menu display process, in addition to the process of displaying the menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state, in the state where the menu screen is displayed, the speaker is displayed in response to the player's operation of the push button 31B. It includes processing for adjusting the volume output from 8L and 8R and processing for adjusting the amount of light (brightness) of the game effect lamp 9 .

In the demonstration effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 sets a timer until the customer waiting demonstration effect is started, such as a timer for waiting for the start of the customer waiting demo effect, based on the reception of the customer waiting demo designation command. The customer waiting demonstration effect may be started based on the time-out of the timer without starting the variable display. In addition, when the variable display is started while the customer waiting demonstration effect start waiting timer is operating or the customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed, the customer waiting demonstration effect start waiting timer is cleared, the customer waiting demonstration effect is interrupted, The display of the image display device 5 may be switched to the variable display of decorative patterns.

(Production control process processing)
FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 16 as the effect control process. In the production control process shown in FIG. 17, the production control CPU 120 first starts the reservation storage display (first reservation display 002SG101 and second reservation display 002SG102) in the special figure reservation storage display area 5U of the image display device 5. A pending display update process for updating the display according to the stored contents of the received command buffer 002SG194A at the time of winning and performing shift display, etc., which will be described later, is executed (step S161). After executing the pending display update process, one of the following processes of steps S170 to S175 is selected and executed according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

In addition, in step S161, based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning transmitted from the main board 11, determination for executing the pre-reading advance notice effect (for example, the effect of changing the display color of the pending display, etc.) A pre-reading notice setting process in which determination, setting, etc. are performed may be executed together with the pending display update process.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable bodies 32A and 32B, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, commands to the lamp control board 14 (illumination signals ), such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, various effect control during the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving a performance control command designating the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4". Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving the command designating the start of the jackpot game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "lost", and the production process flag is set. is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "4". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Further, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is changed to "5", which is the value corresponding to the ending production process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "5". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big win game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Variable display start setting process)
Next, operation|movement of CPU120 for production|presentation control is demonstrated. FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is ON (step 002 SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is in the ON state (step 002SGS271; Y), for example, the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer , are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 002 SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Also, if the first variable display start command reception flag is off at step 002SGS271 (step 002SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 002SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 002SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 002SGS273; Y ), for example, various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning command buffer, buffer number 1 It is shifted upward by one piece (step 002SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

After executing step 002SGS272 or step 002SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 002SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decorative design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) and the variation pattern (step 002SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. do.

In this embodiment, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120, for example, determines that the three symbols are "7" as the stop symbols. ”Determines a combination of matching decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). Also, if the received variable display result designation command is a third variable display result designation command to a fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot B to the probability variable jackpot C, an odd number other than "7" is used as the stop symbol. It is determined from a plurality of combinations of symbols (for example, combination of decoration symbols such as "111", "333", "555", "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the non-probability variable jackpot, the effect control CPU 120, for example, sets a combination of decoration patterns in which three patterns are even numbers as the stop pattern. to decide.

In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the non-probability variable jackpot, the received variable display result designation command is the third variable corresponding to the probability variable jackpot B to the probability variable jackpot C As in the case of the display result designation command to the fourth variable display result designation command, a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", "333", "555", "999 , etc.)) may be determined. In this case, by further sharing the effects during the variable display during the jackpot game and the variable probability state, it is possible to determine whether the game state is the variable probability state or the time reduction state until the variable display is executed 100 times. , the player can be made to pay attention to whether the time saving state ends after 100 times of variable display or continues until 10,000 times of variable display, and interest can be improved.

Further, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss and the variation pattern of the variable display is the non-reach variation pattern, the three symbols are irregular as the stop symbols. A combination of symbols (lost symbols) is determined. Further, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss and the variation pattern of the variable display is the reach variation pattern, the left and right symbols are the same as the stop symbol, but the middle A combination of reach-losses with different symbols (losing symbols) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the variation pattern specification command read at step 002 SGS 275 is a variation pattern specification command of super reach (variation patterns PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, PB1-4) with pseudo-continuation. It is determined whether or not there is (step 002SGS277). If the variation pattern specification command read at step 002SGS275 is not a super reach variation pattern specification command, that is, if it is a normal reach variation pattern specification command (step 002SGS278; N), proceed to step 002SGS383.

When the variation pattern designation command read out at step 002 SGS275 is a variation pattern designation command of super reach, from the data indicating the stop design of the decorative design determined at step 002 SGS276 and stored in the decorative design display result storage area, reach The display colors of the stop symbols in the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5C forming the state are specified. Then, using the pseudo-repeat number display determination table shown in FIG. The display color of the pseudo repetition number display (for example, "x2") indicating that the variable display is started twice is determined and stored (step 002 SGS278).

Next, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern designation command read out in step 002 SGS275 is a pseudo-run twice super reach variation pattern (step 002 SGS279), and when it is determined that it is a pseudo-run two times super reach variation pattern (Step 002SGS279; Y), using the pseudo-repeated count display determination table shown in FIG. The display color of the pseudo consecutive number display (for example, "x3") indicating that the variable display is started three times including the first variable display is determined and stored (step 002 SGS280).

Then, when it is determined in step 002SGS279 that the variation pattern is not two times of pseudo-repeated, or when the process of step 002SGS280 is executed, a start waiting timer for starting display of the number of pseudo-repetitions is set (step 002SGS281). , go to step 002 SGS 282 .

Next, at step 002SGS282, a process table corresponding to the variation pattern is selected (step 002SGS282), and a process timer is started (step 002SGS283).

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 002SGS284). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 002SGS285). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 002SGS286). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of left, middle, right decorative patterns and small patterns into the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses. A signal corresponding to the image data written in is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (fluctuation) of decorative patterns and small patterns. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172) (step 002 SGS287), and the variable display start setting process is terminated.

(decorative design and small design)
Next, decorative patterns and small patterns will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 22. FIG. FIG. 19 is a diagram for explaining decorative patterns and small patterns. 20, (A1) and (A2) are the first production mode, (B1) and (B2) are the second production mode, (C1) and (C2) are the third production mode, and (D1) and (D2) are the fourth production mode. It is a figure which shows the aspect of a mode. 21, (A1) and (A2) are diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display area and the decoration pattern in the first rendering mode, and (B1) and (B2) in the second rendering mode. 22, (C1) and (C2) show the third production mode, (D1) and (D2) show the relationship between the variable display area and the decoration pattern in the fourth production mode, and (E) shows the decoration pattern and the small pattern. and FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a variable display aspect of .

In FIG. 19, the sizes of decorative patterns (for low base state), decorative patterns (for high base state), and small patterns are those displayed in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and display area 5S. It is displayed as a ratio.

As shown in FIG. 19, when the gaming state is the low base state, the decorative symbols (for the low base state) displayed in the respective decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are circular number pedestals and Numeral display section 002SG051 consisting of numbers "0" to "9" displayed on the front of the number pedestal, and 10 types of characters corresponding to each number "0" to "9" of the number display section 002SG051 ( Illustration of all characters is omitted), a character display portion 002SG052, a rectangular information pedestal in front view, and information about characters displayed in front of the information pedestal (for example, in the present embodiment, , character name), and a substantially rectangular pedestal display section 002SG054 that is displayed so as to surround the number display section 002SG051, the character display section 002SG052, and the information display section 002SG053. be.

In this embodiment, the information display section 002SG053 displays the name of the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052, but the present invention is not limited to this. As long as the information is related to the character displayed in the section 002SG052, various information other than the name (for example, information such as the character's nickname, personality, battle level, and items possessed by the character) may be displayed.

In addition, when the game state is the high base state, the decorative patterns (for the high base state) displayed in the respective decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are number display portions consisting of numbers "0" to "9". 002SG061 and a substantially rectangular pedestal display portion 002SG064 that is displayed so as to surround the number display portion 002SG061. The decorative symbols for the high base state are not provided with the character display portion and the information display portion unlike the decorative symbols for the low base state.

In addition, in the display area 5S provided in the upper left part of the image display device 5, the first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, and a small pattern (fourth pattern) corresponding to the decoration pattern are displayed. The small patterns consist of numbers "0" to "9" displayed in the small pattern display areas 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR, respectively, and each number corresponds to a decoration pattern. In this embodiment, the numbers of the decorative patterns and the numbers of the small patterns correspond to each other, but the numbers of both patterns do not necessarily correspond to each other. It may be a number from '1' to '5' which is less than the number '0' to '9', or it may be a symbol or figure different from the number of the decorative pattern.

Next, decorative patterns (for low base state), decorative patterns (for high base state) and small patterns will be described.

<Display timing of each pattern> Decorative patterns (for low base state) and decorative patterns (for high base state) are almost displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R while the power of the image display device 5 is on. Although it is always displayed, it may be erased (not displayed) when, for example, an SP ready-to-win effect (super ready-to-win effect) is executed during variable display, or when a customer waiting demo effect is executed. On the other hand, while the image display device 5 is powered on, the small pattern is always displayed on the front side (upper layer) of the decorative pattern, and continues to be displayed even when the decorative pattern is erased as described above. Is displayed. When information having a higher display priority than small symbols (for example, error display) is displayed, it may be erased.

<Variable display mode of each pattern> Decorative patterns (for low base state) are displayed in a scroll display that moves linearly from top to bottom in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the first production mode described later. , and in the second presentation mode, variable display is performed by scroll display that moves in a curved manner from the back side to the front side of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

The decorative pattern (for high base state) is variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in a third production mode, which will be described later. , In the fourth effect mode, variable display is performed by scroll display that linearly moves from the top to the bottom of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Regardless of the game state or production mode, the small symbols are displayed variablely in the switching display (updated display in which the symbols are updated) in which the symbols “0” to “9” are switched in each of the small symbol display areas 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR. executed.

In a broad sense, both the "scrolling display" and the "switching display" are included in the "switching display" in which patterns are switched and displayed. "Scroll display" means that a plurality of patterns are updated and displayed by frame-out display or fade-out display from the display area after moving and displaying the pattern. A plurality of symbols may be updated and displayed by repeating display and non-display (erasing) or rotating display without fade-out display, which may be distinguished from "switch display".

<Numerical display part> The decorative pattern (for low base state) and the decorative pattern (for high base state) have character display part 002SG052, information display part 002SG053, and pedestal display part 002SG054 in addition to number display parts 002SG051 and 002SG061. On the other hand, the small pattern is composed only of the number display portion.

In addition, the decorative patterns (for the low base state) are displayed in the same size in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R. By displaying in a size slightly smaller than the decorative pattern display area 5R, a sense of depth is created. On the other hand, the decorative patterns (for the high base state) are displayed in the same size in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, and arranged linearly in the horizontal direction. The small patterns are displayed in the same size in each of the small pattern display areas 5SL, 5SC and 5SR.

In addition, in the low base state, the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R are arranged substantially horizontally at approximately the center position of the image display device 5 in the vertical direction, but the middle decorative design display area 5C is arranged. is positioned slightly above the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R. In the high base state, the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged substantially horizontally at substantially the center position of the image display device 5 in the vertical direction. Therefore, the decorative symbols stopped and displayed at the stop position of the middle decorative design display area 5C in the high base state are displayed in the image display device more than the decorative symbols stopped and displayed at the stop position of the middle decorative design display area 5C in the low base state. 5 is placed near the center of the display screen (see FIG. 20).

In addition, when the size of the number display portion 002SG051 of the decorative pattern (for low base state) is used as a reference, the size of the number display portion 002SG061 of the decorative pattern (for high base state) is large, and the size of the number display portion of the small pattern is large. is small. In other words, the size of the number display area is larger in order of decorative design (for high base state), decorative design (for low base state), and small design. (for low base state) > small pattern). In addition, the overall size of each pattern has the same relationship as that of the number display portion.

In this way, in the low base state, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R are made to appear large, and the decorative patterns in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C are shifted to give a sense of depth. In addition, in the high base state where the average variable display period is short, the decoration pattern is arranged at a position near the center of the display screen of the image display device 5, so that the degree of recognition of the decoration pattern can be improved. (See FIG. 20).

In addition, the decorative pattern (for the low base state), the decorative pattern (for the high base state), and the number display portions of the small patterns are each formed of a stereoscopic image (3D image, three-dimensional image). A stereoscopic image is, for example, an image created by 3DCG (a virtual solid is constructed (modeled) with points placed on three-dimensional coordinates as vertices, and information for reproducing materials etc. is given to each surface, (reproduced by illuminating an object with arbitrary light intensity, light source position, etc.), but a three-dimensional display device (for example, from a right eye image (R image) and a left eye image (L image) an image liquid crystal panel capable of displaying a stereoscopic image (video), a backlight that irradiates planar light from the rear to the front of the image liquid crystal panel, and the image on the front side of the image liquid crystal panel. and a liquid crystal panel for a parallax barrier provided at a predetermined interval) to be stereoscopically visible.

In addition, among the numbers “0” to “9” of the decorative pattern, the odd numbers “1, 3, 5, 7, 9” are controlled to a high-probability high base state after the jackpot is finished. , and for even numbers of "0, 2, 4, 6, 8", the normal design (non-probability design). It should be noted that even in the event of a variable probability big win, a predetermined big win combination may be obtained according to the normal symbols.

<Character Display Portion> The character display portion 002SG052 of the decoration pattern (for the low base state) is formed of a non-stereoscopic image (2D image, two-dimensional image). Note that the character display portion 002SG052 may be formed of a stereoscopic image (3D image, three-dimensional image). Also, the character displayed on the character display portion 002SG052 performs a predetermined action (movement) when the variable display is started or stopped, as will be described later. On the other hand, the decoration pattern (for the high base state) and the small pattern are not provided with the character display portion.

<Information Display Portion> The information display portion 002SG053 of the decoration pattern (for the low base state) is formed of a non-stereoscopic image (2D image, two-dimensional image). The information display section 002SG053 may be formed with a stereoscopic image (3D image, three-dimensional image). The information display portion 002SG053 displays a "name" which is information about the character displayed in the character display portion 002SG052. It has become. On the other hand, the decoration pattern (for the high base state) and the small pattern are not provided with the information display section.

<Pedestal display part> The pedestal display part 002SG054 of the decoration pattern (for the low base state) displays the decoration part that decorates the character on the front, and is formed with a non-stereoscopic image (2D image, two-dimensional image). . Also, the pedestal display portion 002SG064 of the decorative design (for the high base state) is formed with a stereoscopic image (3D image, three-dimensional image). Note that both the pedestal display portion 002SG054 and the pedestal display portion 002SG064 may be formed of a stereoscopic image (3D image, three-dimensional image). Further, when the size of the pedestal display portion 002SG054 of the decorative design (for the low base state) is used as a reference, the size of the pedestal display portion 002SG064 of the decorative design (for the high base state) is large. On the other hand, the small pattern is not provided with a pedestal display portion.

<Main colors> The color of the numbers displayed in the number display parts 002SG051 and 002SG061 of the decorative patterns (for low base state) and decorative patterns (for high base state) is blue for normal patterns consisting of even numbers, and from odd numbers to blue. The probability variation pattern is said to be "red". The pedestals for numbers other than the numbers, the pedestal display portions 002SG054 and 002SG064, etc. may be displayed in the same color as the numbers or in a color different from the numbers.

Also, the characters displayed in the character display section 002SG052 may be configured in their original colors without being affected by the main colors. Also, the character corresponding to the variable probability symbol is preferably the ally character if, for example, the ally character and the enemy character are separated. Alternatively, it is preferable that the character is a main character of the story, such as a main character in the story among allied characters or a person closely related to the main character.

In addition, as described above, when the story concept of allies and enemies is adapted, the notice effect and SP reach effect are basically expressed from the point of view of the allies, and the allies and enemies fight in the SP reach effect. In the case of such a presentation configuration, it is notified that the player will be in an advantageous state (for example, a big win) when the ally side has an advantageous ending, such as when the ally side wins over the enemy.

Also, the main color having the highest occupation rate in the entire area of each of the decorative pattern (for low base state) and the decorative pattern (for high base state) may be the same color as the number. In addition, although the even-numbered normal symbols are "blue" and the odd-numbered probability variable symbols are "red", other colors may be used.

Also, in the high base state, as described later, the scroll display is performed at high speed, so it is necessary to make it easier to see than the decorative symbols (for the low base state), so decorations such as the stop symbol notice and the fluctuation start notice are displayed. Since effects are often displayed in relation to the design, the decorative design (for high base state) is mainly composed of the number display section 002SG061, and is composed of a character display section and a number display section. It is characterized by a larger design size ratio than the decorative design (for low base state).

Although illustration is omitted in the present embodiment, the numbers of the decorative patterns (for high base state) are more complicated than the numbers of the decorative patterns (for low base state), and the design is more complicated. The high base state may be livened up by making the appearance more flashy, such as making it taller.

On the other hand, the color of the numbers of the small symbols is "yellow" for normal symbols consisting of even numbers, and "yellow-green" for probability variable symbols consisting of odd numbers. In the present embodiment, even-numbered normal symbols are "yellow" and odd-numbered odd-numbered odd-numbered symbols are "yellow-green", but other colors may be used. Also, the same number as the decorative pattern may be the same kind of color as the decorative pattern.

Regarding the design of the small pattern, it is possible to reduce the number material of the decorative pattern in the low base state or high base state as it is, but it is said that the design will enhance the effect. In order to improve visibility for the player, it is preferable that the design is simpler than the decorative numbers (for example, it is flat rather than three-dimensional, and has a simple color without gloss). .

As shown in FIG. 20, the effect control CPU 120 has, as effect modes, a first effect mode (see FIGS. 20 (A1) and (A2)), a second effect mode (see FIGS. 20 (B1) and (B2)), a Either of the 3 production modes (see FIGS. 20(C1) and (C2)) and the 4th production mode (see FIGS. 20(D1) and (D2)) can be executed. The first effect mode and the second effect mode are effect modes that can be executed when the game state is controlled to the low-probability-low base state. In addition, the third effect mode is an effect mode that can be executed when the game state is controlled to the low probability and high base state, and the fourth effect mode is when the game state is controlled to the high probability and high base state. It is an executable production mode.

As shown in FIG. 20 (A1), in the first production mode, the decorative patterns for the low base state are displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the background image of the decorative patterns is a landscape of a town in the daytime. A first background image 002SG081 is displayed. Also, as shown in FIG. 20A2, the variable display of decorative patterns is scroll display (first scroll display) in which the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R move linearly from top to bottom. executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 21A1 and 21A2, each decorative pattern is displayed in a frame downward from the upper side of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then straight downward. , and is framed out downward from the lower sides of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Also, when the preceding decorative pattern displayed in the frame (for example, a decorative pattern of "3") passes through the decorative pattern stop position set in the center of the vertical direction of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, the following decoration pattern (for example, "4" decoration pattern) is displayed in the frame and moves downward. That is, as shown in FIG. 21 (A2), when the leading "3" decorative pattern passes the stop position, the leading "2" decorative pattern and the following "4" decorative pattern cannot be visually recognized. However, after the preceding "3" decoration pattern passes the stop position, the preceding "3" decoration pattern and the subsequent "4" decoration pattern become visible. In this way, the number of decorative patterns increases in order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., and after "9", it returns to "0" and "0" to "9" ” is repeatedly displayed. That is, the decorative patterns are displayed in a loop by displaying the decorative patterns "0" to "9" in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R.

In addition, in the display area 5S provided at the upper left of the screen of the image display device 5, the number of the first reserved memory, the number of the second reserved memory and the small pattern are displayed, and the special figure provided at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 In the pending storage display area 5U and the active display area 5F, the first pending display 002SG101 and the second pending display 002SG102 corresponding to the variable display whose execution is pending, and the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display being executed are displayed. be done. In addition, since the number of these first reserved memories, the number of second reserved memories, the small symbols, the special figure reserved memory display area 5U, and the active display area 5F are displayed in common in all production modes, the explanation is omitted below. do.

As shown in FIG. 20(B1), in the second rendering mode, the decorative patterns for the low base state are displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the background image of the decorative patterns is a landscape of a wilderness in the daytime. A second background image 002SG082 is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 20B2, the variable display of decorative patterns is scroll display (second scroll display) in which the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are curved from the back side to the front side. A variable display is performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 21(B1) and (B2), the left and right decorative patterns approach the center of the screen from the upper left side of the left decorative design display area 5L and the upper right side of the right decorative design display area 5R. After that, it moves downward to the left and right sides of the screen, and moves sideways from the lower left side of the left decorative design display area 5L and the lower right side of the right decorative design display area 5R. displayed out of frame. The middle decoration pattern is enlarged and displayed so as to approach the front side of the middle decoration pattern display area 5C from the back side of the screen, and then displayed out of frame.

In addition, the previous decorative pattern displayed in the frame (for example, the decorative pattern "2") passes through the decorative pattern stop position set at the center position in the vertical direction of the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R. Occasionally, a subsequent decorative pattern (for example, a "3" decorative pattern) is displayed in the frame and moves toward the center of the screen. That is, as shown in FIG. 21 (B2), when the leading "2" decorative pattern is passing near the stop position, the leading "2" decorative pattern and the following "3" decorative pattern are It can be visually recognized, but after the preceding decorative pattern "2" has passed the stop position, the following decorative patterns "3" and "4" can be visually recognized. In this way, the number of decorative patterns increases in order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., and after "9", it returns to "0" and "0" to "9". ” is repeated. In other words, the decorative symbols "0" to "9" are loop-displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, thereby executing the scroll display of the decorative symbols.

As shown in FIG. 20 (C1), in the third production mode, the decorative patterns for the high base state are displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the background image of the decorative patterns is the scenery of the town in the evening. A representative third background image 002SG083 is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 20(C2), the variable display of the decorative design is performed by rotational display in which the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are rotated around a rotation axis pointing in the vertical direction. be.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 22(C1) and (C2), the decoration pattern in the third production mode has a first surface 5a and a second surface 5b opposite to the first surface 5a. , the preceding decorative pattern (for example, a decorative pattern of "3") is displayed on the first surface 5a. On the other hand, when the first surface 5a faces the front, it cannot be specified whether the subsequent decorative pattern (for example, "4" decorative pattern) is displayed on the second surface 5b. That is, since the pedestal display portion 002SG064 has a low transmittance (opaqueness), the decoration pattern displayed on the second surface 5b cannot be seen through from the front side (visible from the front side through the decoration pattern).

Also, the decorative pattern is rotatable in one direction (for example, clockwise or counterclockwise in plan view), and the first surface 5a, the second surface 5b, the first surface 5a, the second surface 5b, . . . By rotating, the numbers increase in order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc. After "9", it returns to "0" and goes from "0" to "9". is repeatedly displayed. In other words, the decoration symbols "0" to "9" are loop-displayed in each of the decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, so that the rotation display of the decoration symbols is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22(C2), when the second surface 5b is displayed by rotating about 90 degrees or more from the state in which the first surface 5a faces the front, the second surface 5b has the first A decorative pattern (for example, a decorative pattern of "4") following the decorative pattern displayed on the surface 5a (for example, a decorative pattern of "3") is displayed. Next, although not shown in particular, when the first surface 5a is displayed by rotating about 90 degrees or more from the state in which the second surface 5b faces the front, the first surface 5a is displayed on the second surface 5b. A decoration pattern (for example, a decoration pattern of "5") following the decoration pattern (for example, a decoration pattern of "4") is displayed.

Further, in the upper right portion of the screen of the image display device 5, a right-handed informing image 002SG201 consisting of a right arrow and characters of "Right-handed" is displayed to notify the player to promote the right-handed operation. In the lower left part, a time saving remaining display 002SG202 (in this example, characters of "remaining XX times", XX=0 to 100) indicating the remaining number of times the time saving control is executed is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 20 (D1), in the fourth effect mode, the decorative patterns for the high base state are displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the background image of the decorative patterns is a night townscape. A representative fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed. Also, as shown in FIG. 20(C2), the variable display of the decorative design is a scroll display (third scroll display) in which the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are linearly moved downward. A variable display is performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 22(D1) and (D2), each decorative pattern is displayed in a frame downward from the upper side of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then straight downward. , and is framed out downward from the lower sides of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Also, when the preceding decorative pattern displayed in the frame (for example, "3" decorative pattern) passes through the decorative pattern stop position set in the vertical center of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Then, the subsequent decoration pattern (for example, the decoration pattern of "4") is displayed in the frame and moves downward. That is, as shown in FIG. 22 (D1), when the leading "3" decorative pattern passes the stop position, the leading "2" decorative pattern and the following "4" decorative pattern cannot be visually recognized. However, as shown in FIG. 22 (D2), after the leading "3" decorative pattern has passed the stop position, the leading "3" decorative pattern and the following "4" decorative pattern are visible. becomes. In this way, the number of decorative patterns increases in order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., and after "9", it returns to "0" and "0" to "9". ” is repeated. In other words, the decorative symbols "0" to "9" are loop-displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, thereby executing the scroll display of the decorative symbols.

In addition, in the upper right portion of the screen of the image display device 5, a right-handed informing image 002SG201 including a right arrow and characters "Right-handed" is displayed for informing the player to promote the right-handed operation.

In addition, in the second effect mode, the name of the information display portion 002SG053 of the decorative pattern is always hidden even when the decorative pattern is stopped. In addition, in the third production mode and the fourth production mode, the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner without including the information display section 002SG053. Thus, in the first effect mode, by displaying the information display section 002SG053 to draw attention to the name of the character, the player can deepen his/her understanding of the character. By hiding the information display section 002SG053 in the presentation mode, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the variable display and the notice presentation rather than the characters. It should be noted that not only the name displayed on the information display section 002SG053 but also the information display section 002SG053 itself may be hidden.

As shown in FIG. 22(E), the decoration pattern and the small pattern are different in variable display mode. For example, during the period in which the decorative patterns are scrolled and displayed at high speed, one decorative pattern passes through the frame-in display from the upper sides of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R and the frame-out display from the lower sides. A period Ta2 is required. That is, one decorative pattern is displayed, and it takes a period Ta2 until the display of the decorative pattern is finished. On the other hand, the small symbols are switched (updated) a plurality of times (for example, 5 times) to display the small symbols of the losing combination during the period Ta2.

Specifically, when the frame rate (screen display speed) is set to 30 FPS (displaying 30 frames (frames) of images per second), from the start of the display of one decorative pattern to the end of the display An image of 10 frames is displayed at , and the period Ta2 is about 0.3 seconds.

On the other hand, small symbols of different combinations (for example, "635", "175", "461", "532", "913", etc.) are displayed every two frames (period Ta1). That is, during the period Ta2 from when one decoration pattern is displayed to when the display of the decoration pattern is finished, the small patterns of the losing combination are switched five times and displayed for each period Ta1 (period Ta1 < period Ta2). It should be noted that the small symbols of each lost combination are displayed for the period Ta1, but since it is only a moment (about 0.06 seconds), it is difficult to visually confirm.

Also, when it is determined that the display result of the variable display will be the result of the display of the failure, the effect control CPU 120 decides to stop display the fixed decorative pattern of the failure combination (for example, "326"). , after starting the variable display of the decoration pattern and before stopping and displaying the fixed decoration pattern (for example, "326") of the lost combination, the small pattern of the lost combination of "326", which is the same as the decorative pattern, is not displayed. Switching display is performed as follows. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fact that the decorative symbols of the lost combination will be stop-displayed in advance from the small symbols of the lost combination.

In addition, in the scroll display in the first production mode, the second production mode and the fourth production mode, and the rotating display in the third production mode, the decorative pattern changes the variable display speed from low speed to high speed at the start of the variable display, When the variable display stops, it changes from high speed to low speed, that is, the variable display speed can be changed. ing.

(Various actions with decorative patterns)
Next, various operation displays of decorative patterns will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing (A) a decorative symbol variation start action, (B) a variation stop action, and (C) a loop action.

As shown in FIGS. 23(A) to 23(C), the decorative patterns for the low base state are moved within the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R or displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R for variable display. It rotates within the areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, but apart from such variable display movements, it is possible to execute various actions (movements) that change the number display portion 002SG051 and the character display portion 002SG052 of the decorative design. .

(variable start action)
As shown in FIG. 23(A), when the variable display is started in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 in the decoration pattern is horizontally reversed. A "variation start action" that causes Specifically, the character puts both hands on the waist and faces diagonally forward right in the variation start action A1, and raises both hands upward and faces forward in the variation start action A2. In action A3, the character puts both hands on the waist and looks diagonally to the left. Here, for convenience of explanation, only three frames of the variation start action A1, A2, and A3 are shown, but in reality, the character is displayed over several tens of frames within the variation start action period (A1 to A3). As a result, a variation start action (movement) is performed in which the orientation of the character's body changes in the order of diagonally forward right (A1), front (A2), and diagonally forward left (A3).

Next, after the character's body is turned diagonally forward left, the decoration pattern moves (rises) from the stop position to the side opposite to the scroll direction by a predetermined distance (A4), and then starts moving downward. to start the scroll display. These fluctuation start actions A1 to A4 are a fluctuation start action period Tb1 (see FIG. 24) from when the variable display of the special design is started to when the scroll display of the decoration design (the movement of the decoration design downward) is started. is executed over

Here, for convenience of explanation, only four frames of the variation start actions A1, A2, A3, and A4 are shown. A change start action (movement) is performed by displaying the movement of the character over ten frames.

In the present embodiment, as the variation start action, a mode in which the orientation of the character's body is horizontally reversed is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation start action is Modifications other than those described above are possible. For example, the character's hair or facial expression may change, or the body may move. At least one of the number display portion 002SG051, the character display portion 002SG052, the information display portion 002SG053, and the pedestal display portion 002SG054, which form the decorative pattern, should be an action. In other words, the variable start action is an action that is executed before the decorative pattern starts scrolling display or rotating display, and is an action that changes in the scrolling display, that is, a separate action that operates in a manner different from the scrolling display. be.

Further, in the first effect mode, the name of the character (character-related information) displayed in the information display section 002SG053 is erased (hidden) during the variable start action period Tb1. In this manner, the name of the character is made easy to see when it is stopped, and the name of the character is hidden after the start of the scroll display, so that attention can be drawn to the scroll display.

Specifically, the variable display period of the special symbols includes a pre-variable display period from when the variable display of the special symbols and small symbols is started until the scrolling display of the decorative symbols is started, and the scrolling display of the decorative symbols. and a variable post-display period after being initiated. The name of the character (character-related information) displayed on the information display section 002SG053 is displayed during the pre-variable display period, that is, when the change start action is being executed, and then the post-variable display period starts. , that is, before the scroll display of the decoration pattern is started. In this way, by erasing the name before the variable start action period Tb1, that is, before the scroll display is started, it is possible to draw attention to the variable display, the advance notice effect, etc., rather than the name.

Further, in the present embodiment, the period from the start of the variable display of the special symbols and small symbols to the start of the scroll display of the decorative symbols is set as the pre-variable display period. However, the pre-variable display period is the period from when the condition for starting variable display is satisfied until the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, that is, the timing when the start winning occurs and the reserved memory. A period from when the variable display based on the display pattern is started to when the scroll display of the decoration pattern is started may be sufficient.

(fluctuation stop action)
As shown in FIG. 23(B), when the variable display ends in the first effect mode and the second effect mode (when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed), the decorative pattern is displayed on the character display portion 002SG052. "Variation stop action" is executed in which the character that is being displayed is enlarged and displayed.

Specifically, when the scroll-displayed decoration pattern is temporarily stopped at the stop position, the character changes from the normal mode of placing the hand on the waist and facing diagonally forward to the right (fluctuation stop action B1) to the normal mode. After being enlarged and displayed so as to protrude far above the pedestal display portion 002SG054 (variation stop action B2), it is reduced and restored to the normal mode (variation stop action B3).

Here, for convenience of explanation, only three frames of the fluctuation stop actions B1, B2, and B3 are shown. A change stop action (movement) is performed by displaying the movement of the character over ten frames.

In the present embodiment, a mode in which a character is enlarged and displayed is exemplified as a variation stop action. For example, the character's hair or facial expression may change, or the body may move. At least one of the number display portion 002SG051, the character display portion 002SG052, the information display portion 002SG053, and the pedestal display portion 002SG054 that form the decoration pattern may take action. In other words, the change stop action is an action that is executed when the scrolling display of the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped, and is a separate action from the changing action such as the scrolling display and the rotating display.

(loop action)
As shown in FIG. 23(C), when the variable display ends in the first production mode and the second production mode (from the temporary stop display of the decoration pattern until the stop display (design determination)), the decoration pattern In , the character displayed on the character display portion 002SG052 is repeatedly reduced and restored, and the number display portion 002SG051 is repeatedly rotated horizontally around the vertical axis of rotation.

Specifically, in the loop action C1, the character puts both hands on the waist and looks diagonally forward to the right, while the number display section 002SG051 faces the front. The characters are displayed in a reduced size so that they can be accommodated, and the number display portion 002SG051 is rotated about 45 degrees to the right. In the loop action C4, the character is displayed in a reduced size so that it fits on the pedestal display portion 002SG054, and the number display portion 002SG051 is rotated to the left by about 45 degrees. In this loop action, the loop actions C1, C2, C3, and C4 are sequentially executed over the loop action period Tb3, and after the loop action period Tb3 ends, the loop action C1 is returned to, and the actions of the loop actions C1 to C4 are executed again over the loop action period Tb3. is executed. That is, in loop actions, loop actions C1 to C4 are periodically executed.

Here, for convenience of explanation, only four frames of the loop actions C1 to C4 are displayed, but in reality, the character is restored after being displayed in reduced size, and the number display section 002SG051 is rotated and restored. In the loop action period Tb3 up to , a loop action (operation) is performed by displaying the character and number display portion 002SG051 over several tens of frames.

In the present embodiment, as the loop action, the character is displayed in a reduced size and the numeric display unit 002SG051 rotates. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The mode of the loop action can be changed to a mode other than the above. For example, the character's hair or facial expression may change, or the body may move. At least one of the number display portion 002SG051, the character display portion 002SG052, the information display portion 002SG053, and the pedestal display portion 002SG054, which form the decorative pattern, should be an action. That is, the loop action is an action that is executed from when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position until it is stopped and displayed (design is confirmed), and is a separate action from the action that changes during the scroll display.

(Comparison of various action periods and light emission periods)
Next, various actions of decorative patterns and light emission control of lamps will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24, (A) is a diagram comparing various actions of decoration patterns and periods of lamp light emission control, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of loop light emission control of the lamp.

As shown in FIG. 24(A), the variation start actions A1 to A4 (see FIG. 23(A)) of decorative symbols have a variation start action period Tb1 of about 1.5 seconds (variation start action period Tb1=approximately 1.5 seconds), consisting of images of approximately 45 frames. In addition, the variation stop action period Tb2, which is the execution period of the variation stop action B1 to B3 (see FIG. 23B) of the decorative symbols, is about 0.8 seconds (the variation stop action period Tb2=about 0.8 second). ), consisting of about 28 frames of images. In addition, the loop actions C1 to C4 (see FIG. 23C) of the decorative symbols have a loop action period Tb3, which is a period of 1, of approximately 1.8 seconds (loop action period Tb3=approximately 1.8 seconds). It consists of about 55 frames of images.

Further, as shown in FIG. 24(B), movable body lamps 9d provided on each of the movable body 32A provided on the upper part of the image display device 5 and the movable body 32B provided on the lower part of the image display device 5, The main lamp 9a and the frame lamp 9b provided in the gaming machine frame 3 emit light based on the loop light emission control performed by the effect control CPU 120 when the game state is the low base state.

In this loop light emission control, for example, "white", "blue", and "yellow" are emitted in order over the loop light emission period Tb4, which is a period of 1, and after the end of the loop light emission period Tb4, the light returns to "white", and loop light emission is performed again. During the period Tb4, "white", "blue", and "yellow" are emitted in this order, and this is repeated periodically. That is, in the loop light emission control, "white", "blue", and "yellow" light emission is performed periodically.

The loop light emission period Tb4 is longer than the loop action period Tb3 (loop action period Tb3<loop light emission period Tb4). In this way, in the low base state, the loop action is repeated in order to encourage the player to variably display the decorative symbols, while in the high base state, the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the low base state. can prevent the variable display from being excessively urged and making the user feel annoyed. In addition, since the loop action is repeated at a shorter period than the loop light emission control, the decorative pattern can be favorably highlighted.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the loop light emission control has exemplified a form in which light emission of “white”, “blue”, and “yellow” is periodically executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. The light emission color and light emission pattern of the lamp in one period can be changed in various ways. A light emission pattern in which light is emitted in order may be performed periodically, or a light emission pattern in which light emission of four or more colors is emitted in order may be performed periodically.

Incidentally, the various actions of the decorative symbols shown in FIG. 24(A) are executed when the game state is controlled to the low base state and the production mode is the first production mode or the second production mode. It is not executed when it is controlled to the high base state and the production mode is the third production mode or the fourth production mode. In the loop light emission control of the movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, and the frame lamp 9b shown in FIG. 24(B), the game state is controlled to the low base state, and the effect mode is the first effect mode or the second effect mode. However, it is not executed when the game state is controlled to the high base state and the effect mode is the third effect mode or the fourth effect mode.

(hold display)
Next, the pending display will be described with reference to FIG. 25, (A1) to (A4) and (B1) to (B4) are diagrams for explaining an operation example of pending display.

As shown in FIG. 25 (A1), in the case of waiting for a game (reserved memory number "0"), the special figure reserved memory display area 5U provided at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 and the active display area 5F , the pending display is not displayed. The special figure reservation storage display area 5U consists of four display areas, the first display area from the left corresponds to the buffer number "1-1" in the start winning reception command buffer 002SG194A, and the second display from the left The area corresponds to buffer number "1-2", the third display area from the left corresponds to buffer number "1-3", and the fourth display area from the left corresponds to buffer number "1-4". ing.

As shown in FIG. 25 (A2), when the start winning (for example, the first start winning) occurs during game standby, in the first display area from the left in the special figure pending storage display area 5U, the first pending display 002SG101 is displayed. Next, the first suspension display 002SG101 starts moving diagonally upward to the left (see FIG. 25A3), and then moves diagonally downward to the left toward the active display area 5F so as to draw a parabola. Then, when it reaches the active display area 5F, it is enlarged and displayed as an active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 25A4).

That is, as shown in FIG. 25 (A2), when the start winning a prize occurs, the first holding display 002SG101 is displayed in the special figure holding storage display area 5U and is not displayed in the active display area 5F, but the first starting winning a prize When the first suspension display 002SG101 is displayed in the special figure suspension storage display area 5U based on the occurrence of , variable display of small symbols is started according to variable display of special symbols.

However, although the variable display has been started, as shown in FIG. 25 (A4), the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special figure pending storage display area 5U is active display Since the display has not been switched to the active display 002SG103 after moving to the area 5F, that is, the shift display has not ended, if the scrolling display of the decorative symbols is started in a state in which the shift display has not ended, either The player may not know whether the scroll display corresponding to the first suspension display 002SG101 has started, and the player may feel uncomfortable.

Therefore, the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special figure pending storage display area 5U is moved and displayed to the active display area 5F, and the pending shift display until it is switched and displayed as the active display 002SG103 The scrolling display (variable display) of decorative patterns does not start until the period ends, the above-mentioned fluctuation start action is executed, and after the pending shift display period ends, the scrolling display (variable display) of decorative patterns starts. It has become so.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25(B1), when the decoration pattern is being displayed in a variable manner and the number of reserved memories is "1" or more (for example, the number of reserved memories is "2"), the image display device In the special figure reservation storage display area 5U provided at the bottom of the screen of 5, the first reservation display 002SG101 is displayed in the first and second display areas from the left, and the active display 002SG103 is displayed in the active display area 5F. It is

As shown in FIG. 25(B2), when the variable display corresponding to the active display 002SG103 displayed in the active display area 5F ends, the active display 002SG103 displayed in the active display area 5F is erased. An erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to highlight that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

The erase effect 002SG110 continues to be displayed even after the active display 002SG103 is erased. Display starts and then disappears. In this way, by not creating a blank period of the effect until the next variable display is started after the end of the variable display, it is possible to prevent the interest of the effect from being lowered. In addition, the erase effect 002SG110 makes the player aware that the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the finished variable display has been erased, and a new active display 002SG103 is displayed to indicate that a new variable display has started. can be recognized.

Next, when the variable display corresponding to the first suspended display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts, the first suspended display 002SG101 starts to move diagonally upward to the left (Fig. 25 (B3)), moving diagonally downward to the left toward the active display area 5F so as to draw a parabola, moving from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, thereby forming the active display 002SG103. Switching display is performed (see FIG. 25 (B4)).

Also, the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left is horizontally moved to the left along with the movement of the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left. Start (see FIG. 25(B3)) and move from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 25(B4)).

That is, as shown in FIG. 25(B2), after the active display 002SG103 is erased upon termination of the variable display, as shown in FIG. The first reserved display 002SG101 has not yet been moved to the active display area 5F, but when the moving display of the first reserved display 002SG101 is started, the variable display of the small symbols is started according to the variable display of the special symbols. .

However, although the variable display has been started, as shown in FIG. 25 (B4), the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special figure pending storage display area 5U is active display Since the movement to the area 5F (shift display) has not been completed, if the scroll display of the decoration pattern is started in this state, it is not known which scroll display corresponding to the first reserved display 002SG101 is started. There is a possibility that the player will feel a sense of incompatibility.

Therefore, the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special figure pending storage display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and is switched and displayed as the active display 002SG103 Hold shift display period Until the end of the scroll display (variable display) of the decoration pattern, the above-mentioned fluctuation start action is executed before the scroll display (variable display) of the decoration pattern is started, and after the pending shift display period ends, the scroll display (variable display) of the decoration pattern It is supposed to start.

Further, in the present embodiment, the special figure reservation storage display area 5U and the active display area 5F are common in the first production mode to the fourth production mode, so that the shift display shown in FIG. Although it is designed to be executed in a common manner in the first production mode to the fourth production mode, for example, when providing a special figure pending storage display area 5U and active display area 5F corresponding to each production mode, each It may be possible to execute a shift display in a mode corresponding to the production mode.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 25, the effect control CPU 120 has a plurality of types of variation patterns (for example, non-reach variation patterns, reach variation patterns, etc.) common operation mode (for example, active from the special figure pending storage display area 5U Shift display is executed to switch the first pending display 002SG101 and the second pending display 002SG102 to the active display 002SG103 in the aspect in which the pending display moves up to the display area 5F in a mountain locus, but it corresponds to each variation pattern and each production mode. It is also possible to execute the shift display of a plurality of types of operation modes. Further, it may be possible to execute a shift display with different operation modes depending on whether the game state is the low base state or the high base state.

In addition, the operation mode common to multiple types of variation patterns in the shift display is at least one of a plurality of elements such as the display mode until the pending display is switched to the active display, the display speed, and the shift display period. Including those that have elements in common.

In addition, in the present embodiment, with the occurrence of the start winning, after the first pending display 002SG101 (or second pending display 002SG102) is displayed in the first display area from the left of the special figure pending storage display area 5U, Although the first pending display 002SG101 (or the second pending display 002SG102) has been exemplified as being displayed (shifted) from the special figure pending storage display area 5U to the active display area 5F, the present invention is limited to this. Instead, if the number of pending memories is "0", the first pending display 002SG101 (or the second pending display 002SG102) is not displayed in the special figure pending memory display area 5U with the occurrence of the start winning, active display The active display 002SG103 may be displayed directly in the area 5F.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first pending display 002SG101 is stored as a switching display (shift display) for switching the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the active display along with the start of the variable display of the special symbol. Although the display is exemplified by moving from the first display area from the left in the display area 5U toward the active display area 5F non-linearly (for example, in a mountainous manner), the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display may be linearly moved toward the left. In addition, the switching display (shift display) is not only for sliding display of the pending display, but also the active display 002SG103 displayed in the active display area 5F and the first display area from the left in the special figure pending storage display area 5U The first suspended display 002SG101 that was displayed in the active display area 5F may be erased once, and the display of the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the new variable display may be started in the active display area 5F.

(Example of operation of each part at the start of variable display)
Next, an operation example of each part at the start of variable display will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 to 35. FIG. FIG. 26 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the first effect mode. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols following FIG. FIG. 28 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the second effect mode. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols following FIG. FIG. 30 is a diagram showing the details of the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in FIG. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols as Modification 1. In FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols following FIG. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the third effect mode. FIG. 34 is a diagram for explaining how the decorative design looks. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the fourth effect mode.

In the following diagrams showing the display screen of the image display device 5, the diagrams represented by lines other than solid lines (for example, dashed-dotted lines, dotted lines, etc.) and arrows without symbols are displayed on the display screen. It is not intended to show an image that has been processed, but to explain the movement of the image.

(Operation example of variable display in the first production mode)
First, an operation example of each part when the variable display of decorative patterns is started in the first effect mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. FIG.

FIG. 26(A) shows a state in which, in the first effect mode, the decorative designs scrolled in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position. Here, the variable display of the special symbols is not finished yet, and the decorative symbols are in the temporary stop display state, so the small symbols displayed in the display area 5S are being variably displayed. In addition, active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display is displayed in the active display area 5F, and two first reserved displays 002SG101 are displayed in the special figure reserved storage display area 5U (first reserved storage number "2").

Then, as shown in FIG. 26(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is completed and the small symbols are displayed in a stopped combination in the combination of missing symbols, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the completed variable display is displayed as the active display. Along with being erased from the area 5F, an erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

As shown in FIG. 26(C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started, the variable display of small symbols is started, The decorative design variation start action (see FIG. 23A) is started in the order of the left decorative design display area 5L, the right decorative design display area 5R, and the middle decorative design display area. Also, a shift display is started in which the two first suspension displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first pending display 002SG101 starts to move diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left so as to draw a parabola, and moves from the first display area from the left to the active display area. By moving to 5F, it is displayed as active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 26(D)). In addition, the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left moves horizontally to the left ( Shift display) is started (see FIG. 26(C)), and the display area moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 26(D)).

The erase effect 002SG110 displayed in FIG. 26B continues for a while after the next variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started. is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 26(E), when the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left ends the shift display to move to the active display area 5F, it is displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L. When the actions A1 to A3 of the ornamental pattern that is displayed are finished, the action A4 of rising is started, and when the rising movement (action A4) is finished, as shown in FIG. 26F, downward movement is started and scrolling Display starts.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26(F), the actions A1 to A3 of the decoration symbols displayed in the right decoration symbol display area 5R are completed, the upward action A4 is started, and the upward movement (action A4) is completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 26G, downward movement is started and scroll display is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26(G), the actions A1 to A3 of the decoration symbols displayed in the middle decoration symbol display area 5C are completed, the upward action A4 is started, and the upward movement (action A4) is completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 26(H), downward movement is started and scroll display is started.

In this way, as the variable display corresponding to the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started and the variable display of the small pattern is started, the left decorative pattern display area 5L, The variable display of the decoration symbols stopped and displayed is started in the order of the right decoration design display area 5R and the middle decoration design display area, but the first suspension display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is displayed as active. Until the shift display for moving to the area 5F is completed, the scroll display of the decorative designs displayed in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R is not started.

In other words, after the movement of the first suspended display 002SG101 to the active display area 5F is completed (the shift display ends) and displayed as the active display 002SG103, the scrolling display is started. It is possible to make the player recognize that the game has been started without a sense of incongruity. Also, from the start of the shift display along with the start of the variable display to the end of the shift display, although the decorative symbols are not scrolled, the variation start action is performed. can be recognized.

Further, when the scroll display of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started, the scroll display speed (moving speed) gradually increases in the order of low speed, medium speed, and high speed. The transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases proportionally, and fade-out display is executed in which the transmittance becomes almost 100% at high speed. For example, as shown in FIGS. 26(F) and 26(G), the decorative symbols in the left decorative design display area 5L are set at low speed immediately after the start of the variable display, and after passing through the medium speed shown in FIG. (I) becomes the high speed shown in (J) and (K). Since the transmittance also increases as the speed increases, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern when the speed increases. Further, as shown in FIGS. 26(G) to 27(K), the decorative patterns in the right decorative pattern display area 5R and the decorative patterns in the middle decorative pattern display area 5R are also slowed down immediately after the start of the variable display, and A fade-out display is executed in which the speed becomes faster and the transmittance increases with the acceleration.

(Operation example of variable display in the second production mode)
Next, an operation example of each part when the variable display of decorative patterns is started in the second effect mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. FIG.

FIG. 28(A) shows a state in which, in the second effect mode, the decorative symbols scrolled in the respective decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position. Here, the variable display of the special symbols is not finished yet, and the decorative symbols are in the temporary stop display state, so the small symbols displayed in the display area 5S are being variably displayed. In addition, active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display is displayed in the active display area 5F, and two first reserved displays 002SG101 are displayed in the special figure reserved storage display area 5U (first reserved storage number "2"). In addition, in the second effect mode, the name of the decorative design information display portion 002SG053 is always hidden, including when the decorative design is stopped.

Then, as shown in FIG. 28(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is completed and the small symbols are displayed in a stopped combination in the combination of missing symbols, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the completed variable display is displayed as active. Along with being erased from the area 5F, an erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

As shown in FIG. 28(C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started, the variable display of small symbols is started, The decorative design variation start action (see FIG. 23A) is started in the order of the left decorative design display area 5L, the right decorative design display area 5R, and the middle decorative design display area. Also, a shift display is started in which the two first suspension displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first pending display 002SG101 starts to move diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left so as to draw a parabola, and moves from the first display area from the left to the active display area. By moving to 5F, it is displayed as active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 28(D)). In addition, the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left moves horizontally to the left ( Shift display) is started (see FIG. 28(C)), and the display area moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 28(D)).

Note that the erase effect 002SG110 displayed in FIG. 28B continues for a while after the start of the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left. Is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 28(E), when the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left ends the shift display to move to the active display area 5F, it is displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L. After completing the actions A1 to A3 of the decoration pattern, the backward action A4 is started, and when the backward movement to the back side of the display screen (action A4) is completed, as shown in FIG. is started to move and scroll display is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 28(F), the actions A1 to A3 of the decoration symbols displayed in the right decoration symbol display area 5R are completed, the backward action A4 is started, and the backward movement (action A4) is completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 28(G), forward movement is started and scroll display is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 28(G), the actions A1 to A3 of the decoration symbols displayed in the middle decoration symbol display area 5C are completed, the backward action A4 is started, and the backward movement (action A4) is completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 28(H), forward movement is started and scroll display is started.

In this way, as the variable display corresponding to the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started and the variable display of the small pattern is started, the left decorative pattern display area 5L, The variable display of the decoration symbols stopped and displayed is started in the order of the right decoration design display area 5R and the middle decoration design display area, but the first suspension display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is displayed as active. The scroll display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is not started until the shift display for moving to the area 5F is completed.

In other words, after the movement of the first suspended display 002SG101 to the active display area 5F is completed (the shift display ends) and displayed as the active display 002SG103, the scrolling display is started. It is possible to make the player recognize that the game has been started without a sense of incongruity. Also, from the start of the shift display along with the start of the variable display to the end of the shift display, although the decorative symbols are not scrolled, the variation start action is performed. can be recognized.

Further, when the scroll display of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started, the scroll display speed (moving speed) gradually increases in the order of low speed, medium speed, and high speed. The transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases proportionally, and fade-out display is executed in which the transmittance becomes almost 100% at high speed. For example, as shown in FIGS. 28(F) and 28(G), the decorative symbols in the left decorative design display area 5L are set at low speed immediately after the start of the variable display, and after passing through the medium speed shown in FIG. (I) becomes the high speed shown in (J) and (K). Since the transmittance also increases as the speed increases, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern when the speed increases. Further, as shown in FIGS. 28(G) to 29(K), the decorative patterns in the right decorative pattern display area 5R and the decorative patterns in the middle decorative pattern display area 5R are also slowed down immediately after the start of the variable display, and A fade-out display is executed in which the speed becomes faster and the transmittance increases with the acceleration.

In this manner, the scroll display in the second effect mode is designed to move from the back side of the screen toward the front side while increasing the transmittance (transparency) and disappear. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 30A and 30B, in the scroll display, the decorative design moves in a curved shape from the back side to the front side, so that the decorative design display area 5L, Between the frame-in display in 5C and 5R and the frame-out display, another decoration pattern (for example, decoration pattern "2") located so as to partially overlap on the back side with respect to one decoration pattern is displayed. A decorative design (for example, decorative design "3") may be visible through the decorative design "2". At this time, while the character of the character display portion 002SG052 of the decorative pattern "3" is displayed, the number ("3") of the number display portion 002SG051 becomes difficult to see (or is not displayed), and the display of FIG. As shown, after the decoration pattern "2" is erased, the number ("3") of the number display portion 002SG051 of the decoration pattern "3" is displayed.

In addition, another decorative pattern "3" positioned on the back side of the one decorative pattern "2" can be seen through the one decorative pattern "2". As for the other decorative pattern "3", the character of the character display portion 002SG052 is displayed, but the number of the number display portion 002SG051 is not displayed, and after the decorative pattern "2" is erased, the number of the decorative pattern "3" is displayed. is displayed, the number ``2'' of one decoration pattern and the number ``3'' of the other decoration pattern do not overlap, making it difficult to understand the number ``2'' of the decoration pattern positioned on the front side. You can prevent it from slipping.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 30(A), after the decorative design is displayed in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, it is displayed out of the frame as shown in FIG. 30(C). Until the display speed is increased, the decorative patterns are moved and erased while increasing the transmittance (transparency). Since it is designed to be faded out, it is moved from the back side of the screen toward the front side while increasing the transmittance (transparency) while being faded out according to the display speed. 30A to 30C from the start of the scroll display to the high-speed display. Visual recognition of the decorative pattern becomes extremely difficult even on the side.

(Operation example of variable display as modification 1)
Next, an operation example of each part when the variable display of decorative patterns is started as Modification 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. FIG. In this modification 1, the ornamental patterns are scrolled in a curved manner in the same way as in the second production mode, but are moved from the front side of the screen to the back side, which is the opposite side of the second mode. there is

The flow of FIGS. 31A to 31D is the same as that of FIGS. 28A to 28D, and detailed description thereof is omitted here.

As shown in FIG. 31(E), when the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left ends the shift display to move to the active display area 5F, it is displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L. After completing the actions A1 to A3 of the decoration pattern, the backward action A4 is started, and when the forward movement to the front side of the display screen (action A4) is completed, as shown in FIG. is started to move and scroll display is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 31(F), the actions A1 to A3 of the decoration symbols displayed in the right decoration symbol display area 5R are completed, the forward action A4 is started, and the forward movement (action A4) is completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 31(G), backward movement is started and scroll display is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 31(G), the actions A1 to A3 of the decoration symbols displayed in the middle decoration symbol display area 5C are completed, the forward action A4 is started, and the forward movement (action A4) is completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 31(H), backward movement is started and scroll display is started.

In this way, as the variable display corresponding to the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started and the variable display of the small pattern is started, the left decorative pattern display area 5L, The variable display of the decoration symbols stopped and displayed is started in the order of the right decoration design display area 5R and the middle decoration design display area, but the first suspension display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is displayed as active. The scroll display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is not started until the shift display for moving to the area 5F is completed.

In other words, after the movement of the first suspended display 002SG101 to the active display area 5F is completed (the shift display ends) and displayed as the active display 002SG103, the scrolling display is started. It is possible to make the player recognize that the game has been started without a sense of incongruity. Also, from the start of the shift display along with the start of the variable display to the end of the shift display, although the decorative symbols are not scrolled, the variation start action is performed. can be recognized.

Further, when the scroll display of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started, the scroll display speed (moving speed) gradually increases in the order of low speed, medium speed, and high speed. In proportion to this, the transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases, and when the speed increases, a fade-out display is executed in which the transmittance becomes almost 100%. For example, as shown in FIGS. 31(F) and 31(G), the decorative symbols in the left decorative design display area 5L are set at low speed immediately after the start of the variable display, and after passing through the medium speed shown in FIG. (I) becomes the high speed shown in (J) and (K). Since the transmittance also increases as the speed increases, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern when the speed increases. Further, as shown in FIGS. 31(G) to 32(K), the decorative patterns in the right decorative pattern display area 5R and the decorative patterns in the middle decorative pattern display area 5R are also slowed down immediately after the start of the variable display, and A fade-out display is performed in which the speed becomes faster and the transmittance increases as the speed increases.

In this manner, the scroll display as Modification 1 is configured to move from the front side of the screen to the back side while increasing the transmittance (transparency) and erase. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 31(G) and (H), in the scroll display, the decorative design moves in a curved shape from the front side toward the back side. Between the frame-in display in 5C and 5R and the frame-out display, another decoration pattern (for example, decoration pattern "3") positioned so as to partially overlap on the far side with respect to one decoration pattern is displayed. A decorative design (for example, decorative design "2") may be visible through the decorative design "3". At this time, while the character of the character display portion 002SG052 of the decoration pattern "2" is displayed, the number ("2") of the number display portion 002SG051 becomes difficult to see (or is not displayed).

In addition, the other decorative pattern "2" located on the back side of the one decorative pattern "3" is visible through the one decorative pattern "3", but at this time, it is positioned on the far side. As for the other decorative pattern "2", the character of the character display portion 002SG052 is displayed, but the number of the number display portion 002SG051 is not displayed, and after the decorative pattern "2" is erased, the number of the decorative pattern "3" is displayed. is displayed, the number "3" of one decorative pattern and the other decorative pattern "2" are not displayed overlapping, and the decorative pattern "3" positioned on the front side becomes difficult to understand. You can prevent it from slipping.

Further, in the present modification 1, after the decorative patterns are frame-in displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R and before they are framed-out, they are moved and erased while increasing the transmittance (transparency). However, at the start of the variable display, as described above, the decorative pattern is faded out in proportion to the increase in display speed. However, it is moved from the back side of the screen toward the front side while increasing the transmittance (transparency). 31(F) to 31(H) from the start of the scroll display to the high-speed display. Visual recognition of the decorative pattern becomes extremely difficult even on the side.

(Operation example of variable display in the third production mode)
Next, an operation example of each part when variable display of decorative patterns is started in the third effect mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34. FIG.

FIG. 33(A) shows a state in which, in the third effect mode, the decorative designs rotated and displayed in the respective decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop positions. Here, the variable display of the special symbols is not finished yet, and the decorative symbols are in the temporary stop display state, so the small symbols displayed in the display area 5S are being variably displayed. In addition, active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display is displayed in the active display area 5F, and two first reserved displays 002SG101 are displayed in the special figure reserved storage display area 5U (first reserved storage number "2"). Also, the small symbols and the right-handed informing image 002SG201 are displayed so as to be superimposed on the front side (upper layer) of the decorative symbols.

Then, as shown in FIG. 33(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is completed and the small symbols are displayed in a stopped combination in a losing combination, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the completed variable display is displayed as an active display. Along with being erased from the area 5F, an erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

As shown in FIG. 33(C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started, the variable display of the small pattern is started, but the high Since it is in the base state, the decorative symbol variation start action (see FIG. 23A) is not performed. Also, a shift display is started in which the two first suspension displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first pending display 002SG101 starts to move diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left so as to draw a parabola, and moves from the first display area from the left to the active display area. By moving to 5F, it is displayed as active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 33(D)). In addition, the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left moves horizontally to the left ( Shift display) is started (see FIG. 33(C)), and the display area moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 33(D)).

Note that the erase effect 002SG110 displayed in FIG. 33B continues for a while after the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started. Is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 33(F), when the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F, each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, Rotating display of the decoration pattern displayed on 5R is started. In the high base state, the rotating display of the decorative designs displayed in the respective decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R is started all at once.

In this way, when the variable display corresponding to the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started, the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the respective decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed. However, until the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is moved to the active display area 5F, the decorative pattern display area 5L, Rotating display of decorative patterns displayed in 5C and 5R does not start.

In other words, the movement of the first suspended display 002SG101 to the active display area 5F is completed (the shift display ends), and the rotating display is started after being displayed as the active display 002SG103. It is possible to make the player recognize that the game has been started without a sense of incongruity.

In addition, when the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R start rotating, the rotational display speed (moving speed) gradually increases in the order of low speed, medium speed, and high speed. The transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases proportionally, and fade-out display is executed in which the transmittance becomes almost 100% at high speed. For example, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are slowed down immediately after the start of variable display, as shown in FIGS. , the speed shown in FIG. 33(H). Since the transmittance also increases as the speed increases, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern when the speed increases.

As shown in FIG. 34, the rotating display in the third effect mode is such that the decorative pattern is rotated and the first surface 5a and the second surface 5b are displayed repeatedly. , becomes non-transmissive when the rotating display stops. During rotating display, the number display portion 002SG051 on the side of the first surface 5a of the decoration pattern that is in a semi-transparent state is displayed, while the number display portion 002SG051 on the side of the second surface 5b is not displayed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 34(A), in a translucent state in which the decorative design is rotated at a low speed and the transmittance is the first transmittance, it is displayed in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. As for the decorative pattern, the number "326" displayed on the first surface 5a is visible, but the number "437" displayed (to be displayed) on the second surface 5b, which is the back surface, is difficult to be visually recognized. ing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 34(B), in a translucent state in which the decorative design is rotated and displayed at medium speed rotation and the transmittance is the second transmittance higher than the first transmittance, the decorative design display area 5L, As for the decorative patterns displayed on 5C and 5R, the number "437" displayed on the second surface 5b is visible, but the number "548" (to be displayed) displayed on the first surface 5a, which is the back side, is visible. ” is considered to be difficult to see.

Further, as shown in FIG. 34(C), the decorative design is rotated at high speed and displayed, and in the translucent state where the transmittance is the third transmittance higher than the second transmittance, the decorative design display areas 5L and 5C are displayed. , 5R, the number "763" displayed on the first surface 5a is difficult but visible, and the number (to be displayed) displayed on the second surface 5b, which is the back surface "874" is in a state of being difficult to see. It should be noted that both the first surface 5a and the second surface 5b are difficult to see during high-speed rotation display.

In this way, when the decorative pattern is rotated and the front and back sides of the decorative pattern are displayed repeatedly, the decorative pattern is in a semi-transparent state, so the surface of the decorative pattern (for example, the first surface 5a) is displayed. Not only the side but also the back side (for example, the second surface 5b) can be seen through. Since the numbers on the 2nd side 5b) side are not displayed, the numbers on the front side of the decorative pattern and the numbers on the back side are not displayed overlapping, preventing the numbers on the front side from becoming difficult to understand. can. In addition, even when the variable display of the decoration pattern is executed in the high base state, based on the loop light emission control (see FIG. 24 (B)) corresponding to the background pattern, the light emission pattern in the order of white, blue, and yellow may be repeatedly executed. By doing so, the control of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the movable body lamp 9d can be simplified.

(Operation example of variable display in the fourth production mode)
Next, an operation example of each part when variable display of decorative symbols is started in the fourth effect mode will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 35(A) shows a state in which, in the fourth effect mode, the decorative symbols scrolled in the respective decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position. Here, the variable display of the special symbols is not finished yet, and the decorative symbols are in the temporary stop display state, so the small symbols displayed in the display area 5S are being variably displayed. In addition, active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display is displayed in the active display area 5F, and two first reserved displays 002SG101 are displayed in the special figure reserved storage display area 5U (first reserved storage number "2"). Also, the small symbols and the right-handed informing image 002SG201 are displayed so as to be superimposed on the front side (upper layer) of the decorative symbols. (See FIG. 23(A))

Then, as shown in FIG. 35(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is completed and the small symbols are displayed in a stopped combination in the combination of missing symbols, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the completed variable display is displayed as the active display. Along with being erased from the area 5F, an erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

As shown in FIG. 35(C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started, the variable display of the small pattern is started, but the high Since it is in the base state, the decorative symbol variation start action (see FIG. 23A) is not performed. Also, a shift display is started in which the two first suspension displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first pending display 002SG101 starts to move diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left so as to draw a parabola, and moves from the first display area from the left to the active display area. By moving to 5F, it is displayed as active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 35(D)). In addition, the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left moves horizontally to the left ( Shift display) is started (see FIG. 35(C)), and the display area moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 35(D)).

Note that the erase effect 002SG110 displayed in FIG. 35B continues for a while after the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started. Is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 35(F), when the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F, each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, The scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed on 5R is started. In the high base state, the scrolling display of the decorative designs displayed in the respective decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R is started all at once.

In this way, when the variable display corresponding to the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started, the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the respective decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed. However, until the shift display in which the first suspended display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F, the scroll display of the decorative pattern display area 5L, The scrolling display of the decorative designs displayed in 5C and 5R does not start.

In other words, after the movement of the first suspended display 002SG101 to the active display area 5F is completed (the shift display ends) and displayed as the active display 002SG103, the scrolling display is started. It is possible to make the player recognize that the game has been started without a sense of incongruity.

Further, when the scroll display of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started, the scroll display speed (moving speed) gradually increases in the order of low speed, medium speed, and high speed. In proportion to this, the transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases, and when the speed increases, a fade-out display is executed in which the transmittance becomes almost 100%. For example, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are at low speed immediately after the start of variable display, as shown in FIGS. , the speed shown in FIG. 35(H). Since the transmittance also increases as the speed increases, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern when the speed increases.

As described above, in the low base state, the effect control CPU 120 performs the variation start action of the decorative symbol while performing the pending shift display with the start of the variable display, and the special figure pending storage display area 5U. The scroll display of decorative patterns is not started until the shift display for switching the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F as the active display 002SG103 is completed.

By doing so, along with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, a shift display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the active display, and during the shift display, the decorative symbols are displayed in a moving manner. By performing the variable start action to operate in a different mode, the period required for the shift display can be effectively utilized. In addition, since the variable start action is performed when the shift display is performed in the high base state which is more advantageous than the low base state, the start of the variable display of the decoration pattern in the high base state can be excited.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can execute variable display of the decorative pattern based on the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main substrate 11 in the effect control process processing of step S76, and the first type of variation pattern designation command ( For example, when variable display is executed based on a non-reach fluctuation pattern designation command) and when variable display is executed based on a second type of fluctuation pattern designation command (e.g., reach fluctuation pattern designation command), Since the common shift display can be performed, the common shift display is performed even when the variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is executed, so the shift display patterns can be reduced.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the low base state, the effect control CPU 120 performs the variation start action of the decorative symbol while performing the pending shift display with the start of the variable display, and the special figure pending storage display. Until the first suspended display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the area 5U is switched and displayed as the active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F, the scroll display of the decoration pattern is not started, while in the high base state , The effect control CPU 120 has exemplified a form in which the decorative symbol variation start action is not performed when the pending shift display is performed with the start of the variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this, In the high base state, the effect control CPU 120 performs the variation start action of the decorative pattern while performing the pending shift display with the start of the variable display, and the first from the left in the special figure pending storage display area 5U. The scrolling display of decorative patterns may not be started until the first suspended display 002SG101 displayed in the display area is switched and displayed as the active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F.

By doing so, along with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, a shift display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the active display, and during the shift display, the decorative symbols are displayed in a moving manner. By performing the variable start action to operate in a different mode, the period required for the shift display can be effectively utilized. In addition, since the variable start action is performed when the shift display is performed in the high base state which is more advantageous than the low base state, the start of the variable display of the decoration pattern in the high base state can be excited.

In addition, even in the high base state, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the variable display of the decoration pattern based on the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 in the effect control process processing of step S76. When variable display is executed based on the variation pattern specification command (e.g., non-reach variation pattern specification command) and the second type of variation pattern specification command (e.g., reach variation pattern specification command) Variable display is performed based on Since it is possible to perform a common shift display regardless of when the display is performed, a common shift display is performed even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is performed, thereby reducing shift display patterns. can do.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, after the shift display for switching the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the active display is completed, the left , right, and center, the scroll display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started in this order, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special patterns Displayed in one of the left, right, and middle decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R after the shift display for switching the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the active display is completed along with the start of the variable display. If the scrolling display of the displayed decorative pattern is started, the scrolling display of any of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R is started while the shift display is being performed. may

(Example of operation of each part at the time of symbol stop display)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when symbols are stopped will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 to 40. FIG. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing the flow of stop display of decorative symbols in the first effect mode (second effect mode). FIG. 37 is a diagram showing the flow of stop display of decorative symbols following FIG. FIG. 38, (A) to (G) are diagrams showing the flow of stop display of decorative symbols when the number of pending memories is 3 in the first effect mode (second effect mode). 39(A) and (B) are diagrams showing the flow of stop display of decorative symbols in the fourth effect mode (third effect mode).

(Operation example of symbol stop display in the first production mode [holding memory number "2 or less"])
First, an operation example of each part when the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed in the variable display based on the deviation variation pattern when the number of pending memories is 2 or less in the first effect mode will be described based on FIGS. 36 and 37. do. Note that the second effect mode is substantially the same as the first effect mode except for the background image, so detailed description will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 36(A), in a state in which the decorative patterns are displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at high speed and scroll display is being performed, when the stop display timing of each decorative pattern approaches, first, high speed display is performed. The display speed of the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L that has been displayed is reduced, and fade-in display is performed in which the transmittance (transparency) is gradually reduced, thereby improving the visibility of the decorative patterns. (See FIG. 36(B)).

Next, when the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position of the left decorative design display area 5L (see FIG. 36(C)), the transmittance of the decorative design becomes almost 0% (opaque) and the character display section 002SG052. (See FIG. 36(D)), and then a change stop action (see FIG. 23(B)) for restoring the original size is executed (see FIG. 36(E)). Then, the loop action (see FIG. 23(C)) is started in the state of the temporary stop display, and is repeatedly executed until the variable display of the special symbol ends.

When the decoration symbols in the left decoration design display area 5L are temporarily stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. , a fade-in display is performed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, and the visibility of the decoration pattern is improved (see FIG. 36(F)).

Next, when the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position of the right decorative design display area 5R (see FIG. 36(G)), the transmittance of the decorative design becomes almost 0% (opaque), and the character display section 002SG052. (See FIG. 36(H)), and then the change stop action (See FIG. 23(B)) for restoring the original size is executed (See FIG. 37(I)). Then, the loop action (see FIG. 23(C)) is started in the state of the temporary stop display, and is repeatedly executed until the variable display of the special symbol ends.

When the decoration symbols in the right decoration symbol display area 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. , a fade-in display is performed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, and the visibility of the decoration pattern is improved (see FIG. 37(K)).

Next, when the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position of the right decorative design display area 5R (see FIG. 37(K)), the transmittance of the decorative design becomes almost 0% (opaque), and the character display section 002SG052. (See FIG. 37(L)), and then the change stop action (see FIG. 23(B)) for restoring the original size is executed (see FIG. 37(M)). Then, the loop action (see FIG. 23(C)) is started in the state of the temporary stop display, and is repeatedly executed until the variable display of the special symbol ends.

After that, when the variable display of the special symbols is completed, the small symbols are stopped and displayed, and the loop action of the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the respective decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R is completed and stopped. The active display 002SG103 is erased (see FIG. 37(M)).

(Example of operation example of symbol stop display in the first effect mode [number of pending memories "3"])
Next, an operation example of each part when the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed in the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 3 in the first production mode will be described based on FIGS. 38(A) to (G). . Note that the second effect mode is substantially the same as the first effect mode except for the background image, so detailed description will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 38(A), in a state in which decorative patterns are displayed at high speed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R and scroll display is being performed, when the stop display timing of each decorative pattern approaches, first, high speed display is performed. The display speed of the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L that has been displayed is reduced, and fade-in display is performed in which the transmittance (transparency) is gradually reduced, thereby improving the visibility of the decorative patterns. (See FIG. 38(B)).

Next, when the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position of the left decorative design display area 5L (see FIG. 38(C)), the transmittance of the decorative design becomes almost 0% (opaque), but the character display section 002SG052. The change stop action of the character displayed in (see FIG. 23B) is not executed. Also, after the temporary stop display, the loop action of the character (see FIG. 23(C)) is executed.

When the decorative design in the left decorative design display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the display speed of the decorative design in the right decorative design display area 5R, which has been displayed at high speed, decreases, and the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases. A gradual fade-in display is executed, and the visibility of the decoration pattern is improved (see FIG. 38(D)).

Next, when the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position of the right decorative design display area 5R (see FIG. 36(E)), the transmittance of the decorative design becomes almost 0% (opaque), but the character display section 002SG052. The change stop action of the character displayed in (see FIG. 23B) is not executed. Also, after the temporary stop display, the loop action of the character (see FIG. 23(C)) is executed.

When the decorative symbols in the right decorative design display area 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed, the display speed of the decorative designs in the middle decorative design display area 5C, which had been displayed at high speed, decreases, and the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases. A gradual fade-in display is executed, and the visibility of the decoration pattern is improved (see FIG. 38(F)).

Next, when the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position of the right decorative design display area 5R (see FIG. 38(G)), the transmittance of the decorative design becomes almost 0% (opaque), but the character display area 002SG052. The change stop action of the character displayed in (see FIG. 23B) is not executed. Also, after the temporary stop display, the loop action of the character (see FIG. 23(C)) is executed.

After that, when the variable display of the special symbols is completed, the small symbols are stopped and displayed, and the loop action of the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the respective decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R is completed and stopped. The active display 002SG103 is erased (see FIG. 38(G)).

(Operation example of symbol stop display in the fourth production mode)
Next, an operation example of each part when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the variable display in the fourth effect mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 39(A) and 39(B). Note that the third effect mode is substantially the same as the fourth effect mode except for the background image, so detailed description will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 39(A), in a state in which the decorative patterns are scrolled at high speed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, when the stop display timing of each decorative pattern approaches, the decorative patterns are displayed at high speed. The display speed of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R decreases all at once, and a fade-in display is performed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, thereby improving the visibility of each decorative pattern. is improved (see FIG. 39(B)).

Then, the left, middle and right decorative patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed all at once at the stop positions of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. Here, the transmittance of the decorative pattern is almost 0% (opaque), but the action of stopping the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 (see FIG. 23B) is not executed. Also, the character's loop action (see FIG. 23C) is not executed after the temporary stop display.

After that, when the variable display of the special symbols is finished, the small symbols are stopped and displayed, the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the respective decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R are stopped and displayed, and the active display 002SG103 is erased. (See FIG. 39(C)).

Thus, in the low base state, depending on the number of reserved memories (for example, when the number of reserved memories is 2 or less and the variable display based on the shortened variation pattern is executed), the decoration pattern is temporarily changed by the change stop action. While adding variation to the movement during the static display improves the interest, the high base makes it difficult to see the decorative patterns due to the short average variable display period and the number of retained memories being 3 in the low base state. In the state, if the variable display based on the shortened variation pattern is executed regardless of the number of retained memories, the display will be temporarily stopped while maintaining the size without executing the variation stop action, thereby impairing the visibility of the decoration pattern. can be stopped so that it does not

In the present embodiment, the data of animation (moving image) of various motions of decorative patterns are, for example, 1. From the start of the variable display to before the high-speed variable display, 2. high-speed variable display;3. 4. Low speed variable display to variable display stop; It is conceivable to create a video by combining materials for each period, such as a stop pattern. As for the high-speed variable display, as shown in FIGS. 20A2, 20B2, 20C2, and 20D2, the decorative pattern has a high transmittance and is almost transparent. Even if it can be recognized, it is extremely difficult to visually recognize which decorative pattern has passed (represented by arrows in FIGS. 20(A2), (B2), (C2), and (D2)). there). Therefore, even if there is animation data for high-speed variable display for each type of decorative pattern (a type corresponding to which decorative pattern the high-speed variable display is started), it does not make much sense, and the capacity of the ROM 121 is used up. Since it is only pressing, it is preferable to use common data for the animation data of the high-speed variable display regardless of which decoration pattern the high-speed variable display starts from.

(Example of background change operation)
Next, an example of background change operation will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41. FIG. 40, (A1) is a diagram showing the first background image, (A2) is a diagram showing the first predetermined background image, and (B) is a diagram for explaining background changes. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing the flow of background change in the first effect mode.

As shown in FIG. 40, in the first rendering mode, the background images are a first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 40A1) representing a view of the town in the daytime from a distance, and a view of the town in the daytime. can be displayed by switching between the first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 40(A2)). The switching of the background image is triggered when a predetermined switching condition (for example, when the SP reach is lost) is established. In this embodiment, the SP reach is executed at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of variable display) in the next variable display after loss.

In the present embodiment, the first background image 002SG081 and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A are switched and displayed in the first effect mode, but the present invention is limited to this. Alternatively, although not shown, three or more background images including the first background image 002SG081 and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A may be selectively displayed by switching. Also, the fulfillment of the switching condition is not limited to the above. It may be established when it is selected by an operation.

In addition, the start timing of the switching display is the start timing of the variable display of the decoration pattern in the present embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to this, and before the decoration pattern becomes ready state. , any timing in the variable display period.

As shown in FIG. 40B, when switching display from the first background image 002SG081 to the first predetermined background image 002SG081A (or switching display from the first predetermined background image 002SG081A to the first background image 002SG081), The first background image 002SG081 displayed with an opacity of 100% is faded out by gradually increasing the transmittance (transparency) of the first background image 002SG081, while the first background image 002SG081 is hidden with an opacity of 0%. A fade-in display is performed in which the transmittance (transparency) of the background image 002SG081A is gradually reduced. That is, a cross-fade display is performed in which the fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and the fade-in display period B1 of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A are synchronized (fade-out display period A1=fade-in display period B1). . The fade-out display period A1 and the fade-in display period B1 are, for example, about 6 seconds, during which about 210 frames of images are displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 41(A), the transmittance (transparency) increases with the passage of time from the state where the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, making it difficult to see. (See FIG. 41(B)), the transmittance (transparency) of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A displayed in the lower layer of the first background image 002SG081 decreases and gradually becomes visible (see FIG. 41B). 41(C)).

Next, the visibility of the first background image 002SG081 is further reduced, and the visibility of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is increased (see FIGS. 41(D) and (E)), and finally, the first background image 002SG081 is transparent. When the rate becomes 100%, it is erased, while the transmittance of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A becomes 0% and becomes easy to see (see FIG. 41(F)).

In this embodiment, the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-in display period B1 are synchronized, that is, the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-in display period B1 have the same period. is not limited to this, the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-in display period B1 may partially overlap, or the fade-in display period B1 may start after the fade-out display period A1 ends. may be started.

Further, in the present embodiment, the transmittance always increases at a constant rate in the fade-out display of the background image and the decorative pattern, and the transmittance always decreases at a constant rate in the fade-in display of the background image and the decorative pattern. Although the form is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the transmittance in fade-out display or fade-in display of the background image is not necessarily limited to one that increases or decreases at a constant rate. Alternatively, the transmittance may slowly increase or decrease during the first period and then rapidly increase or decrease during the second period.

Further, in the present embodiment, the mode in which the background image is switched and displayed in one rendering mode (for example, the first rendering mode or the second rendering mode) was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. , the first background image corresponding to the first rendering mode is switched to the second background image corresponding to the second rendering mode, and the fade-out display period of the first background image and the fade-in display of the second background image are also performed. It is also applicable to those whose periods are synchronized with each other.

(Example of operation of each part in variable display)
Next, an operation example of each part in variable display in each production mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 45. FIG. FIG. 42 is a timing chart showing the flow of each part of variable display in the first effect mode. FIG. 43 is a timing chart showing the flow of each part of variable display in the second effect mode. FIG. 44 is a timing chart showing the flow of each part of variable display in the third presentation mode and the fourth presentation mode. FIG. 45 is a timing chart showing the state of each part at the start of variable display in (A) the first effect mode, (B) the second effect mode, and (C) the third effect mode and the fourth effect mode. .

(First production mode)
As shown in FIG. 42, in the first effect mode, when the variable display based on the non-reach-out variation pattern PA1-1 is executed with the number of pending memories being "2" or less, with the start of the variable display of the special symbol , The small patterns are variably displayed at high speed, and the variation start action is performed in the order of the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the middle decorative pattern display area 5C. After that, the scroll display starts. Further, a shift display of the pending display is performed, and after the shift display is completed, the scroll display of the decorative design in each of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started (see FIG. 45(A)).

Further, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are gradually accelerated after the start of the scroll display to display at high speed, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed to fade out display. It will be done. This fade-out display period A21 is common to the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R.

Further, when the switching condition for switching the background image from the first background image 002SG081 to the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is satisfied at the start of the variable display, the transmittance of the first background image 002SG081 is changed at the start of the variable display. While the fade-out display in which the (transparency) gradually increases is started, the transmittance (transparency) of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A gradually decreases to start the fade-in display in which it becomes opaque.

When the stop timing of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative design in the left decorative design display area 5L, the decorative design in the right decorative design display area 5R, and the decorative design in the middle decorative design display area 5C are gradually decelerated in this order. As the speed decreases, the transmittance (transparency) decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, and the display fades in. This fade-in display period B21 is common to the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R.

After that, the decorative symbols in the left decorative design display area 5L, the decorative designs in the right decorative design display area 5R, and the decorative designs in the middle decorative design display area 5C are temporarily stopped and displayed in this order. Further, when the temporary stop display is displayed, the variable stop action is performed, and the loop action is repeatedly executed. After that, when the variable display ends and the small pattern is stopped and displayed, the loop action of the decorative pattern ends and is stopped and displayed. After that, the next variable display can be started after a pattern fixing period (for example, 500 ms).

The fade-out display period A1 in which the fade-out display of the first background image 002SG081 is performed is set to be longer than the fade-out display period A21 from the start of the scroll display of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R to the high-speed display. (fade-out display period A1>fade-out display period A21).

Further, the fade-in display period B1 in which the fade-in display of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is performed is from the start of deceleration of the display speed in the scroll display of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R to the temporary stop display. (fade-in display period B1>fade-in display period B21).

Further, when the variable display of the decoration pattern is executed, the movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, and the frame lamp 9b are displayed in white and white based on the loop light emission control corresponding to the background pattern (see FIG. 24(B)). A light emission pattern in the order of blue and yellow is repeatedly executed. Background BGM is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

(Second production mode)
Next, as shown in FIG. 43, in the second effect mode, when the variable display based on the variable pattern PA1-1 of the non-reach loss with the number of pending memories being "2" or less is executed, the variable display of the special symbol is executed. Along with the start, the small patterns are variably displayed at high speed, and the variation start action is performed in the order of the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the middle decorative pattern display area 5C. After that, the scrolling display is started. In addition, a shift display of the pending display is performed, and after the shift display is completed, the scroll display of the decorative design in each of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started (see FIG. 45(B)).

Further, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are gradually accelerated after the start of the scroll display to display at high speed, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed to fade out display. It will be done. This fade-out display period A22 is common to the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R.

Further, when the switching condition for switching the background image from the first background image 002SG081 to the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is satisfied at the start of the variable display, the transmittance of the first background image 002SG081 is changed at the start of the variable display. While the fade-out display in which the (transparency) gradually increases is started, the transmittance (transparency) of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A gradually decreases to start the fade-in display in which it becomes opaque.

When the stop timing of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative design in the left decorative design display area 5L, the decorative design in the right decorative design display area 5R, and the decorative design in the middle decorative design display area 5C are gradually decelerated in this order. As the speed decreases, the transmittance (transparency) decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, and the display fades in. This fade-in display period B22 is common to the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R.

After that, the decorative symbols in the left decorative design display area 5L, the decorative designs in the right decorative design display area 5R, and the decorative designs in the middle decorative design display area 5C are temporarily stopped and displayed in this order. Further, when the temporary stop display is displayed, the variable stop action is performed, and the loop action is repeatedly executed. After that, when the variable display ends and the small pattern is stopped and displayed, the loop action of the ornamental pattern is ended and stopped and displayed. After that, the next variable display can be started after a pattern fixing period (for example, 500 ms).

The fade-out display period A1 in which the fade-out display of the first background image 002SG081 is performed is set to be longer than the fade-out display period A22 from the start of the scroll display of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R to the high-speed display. (fade-out display period A1>fade-out display period A22). By doing so, the fade-out display basically gives the impression that the fade-out display disappears abruptly as it is executed in a short period of time. As for the fade-out display that may be executed at a certain time, etc.), it should be noted that the variable display of the decorative pattern is started by executing the fade-out display of the decorative pattern in a shorter period than the fade-out display of the background image. be able to.

Further, the fade-in display period B1 in which the fade-in display of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is performed is from the start of deceleration of the display speed in the scroll display of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R to the temporary stop display. (fade-in display period B1>fade-in display period B22). By doing so, the fade-in display gives an impression that the fade-in display is basically performed in a short period of time, so that the variable display of the decorative pattern and the background change occur at the same time (for example, when the variable display is stopped). Note that the fade-in display of the decorative pattern is executed in a shorter period of time than the fade-in display of the background, and the variable display of the decorative pattern ends. can be made

Further, the fade-out display period A22 when the scroll display is executed in the second effect mode is longer than the fade-out display period A21 when the scroll display is executed in the first effect mode (the fade-out display period A21 <Fade-out display period A22, see FIGS. 45A and 45B). By doing so, in the second production mode, not only is the mode of scroll display of the decorative patterns different from that in the first production mode, but the display becomes high-speed after the start of the scroll display, and the decorative patterns can be visually recognized. Since the fade-out display period A22 until it becomes difficult is lengthened, it is possible to draw attention to the decorative pattern for a long period of time.

In the present embodiment, as the variable display of decorative symbols in the second effect mode, as a special variable display that is different from the first scroll display that moves linearly from top to bottom in the first effect mode, Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the second scroll display is applied in which the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are curved from the back side to the front side, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first scroll display. The special variable display, which is different from the above, is not limited to moving the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in a curved shape from the back side to the front side as described above, as described in the first modification, Various scroll displays are applied, such as a scroll display that moves in a curved shape from the front side to the back side of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, or a scroll display that moves in a straight line or curve from the bottom to the top. good too.

Further, when the non-reach loss variation pattern PA1-1 is determined in the first effect mode and when the non-reach loss variation pattern PA1-1 is determined in the second effect mode, fade-out display periods A21 and A22 different. By doing so, the player can predict that the determined variation pattern is the non-reach loss variation pattern PA1-1 because the fade-out display period is the same despite the different production modes. Since it becomes difficult, the amusement of the game is improved.

Also, the fade-out display period A1 in which the fade-out display of the first background image 002SG081 is performed and the fade-out display period A22 from the start of the scroll display of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R to the high-speed display are different. That is, the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-out display period A22 are not executed (synchronized) at the same time (for example, at the start of the variable display), so that it becomes difficult to understand that the variable display of the decoration pattern has started. can be prevented. Specifically, when the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-out display period A22 are synchronized, the decorative pattern and the first background image 002SG081 disappear together, making it difficult to understand that the variable display of the decorative pattern has started. By erasing the decorative pattern, the decorative pattern can be made conspicuous.

Further, a fade-in display period B1 in which the fade-in display of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is performed, and a period from the start of deceleration of the display speed in the scroll display of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R to the temporary stop display. That is, the fade-in display period B1 and the fade-in display period B21 are not executed (synchronized) at the same time (for example, when the variable display is stopped). It is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to understand that the variable display has started. Specifically, when the fade-in display period B1 and the fade-in display period B21 are synchronized, the decoration pattern and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A appear together, making it difficult to understand that the variable display of the decoration pattern has been stopped. Therefore, by making the decorative pattern appear first, the decorative pattern can be made conspicuous.

Further, when the variable display of the decoration pattern is executed, the movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, and the frame lamp 9b are displayed in white and white based on the loop light emission control corresponding to the background pattern (see FIG. 24(B)). A light emission pattern in the order of blue and yellow is repeatedly executed. Background BGM is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

(3rd and 4th production modes)
Next, as shown in FIG. 44, in the third effect mode and the fourth effect mode, when the variable display based on the shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern PA1-3 is executed, with the start of the variable display of the special symbol , the small patterns are variably displayed at high speed, and the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R all start rotating or scrolling without performing a variation start action. In addition, a shift display of the pending display is performed, and after the shift display is completed, the scroll display of the decorative design in each of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started (see FIG. 45(C)).

Further, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are gradually accelerated after the start of the scroll display to display at high speed, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed to fade out display. It will be done. This fade-out display period A23 is common to the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R.

When the stop timing of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are gradually decelerated all at once to be displayed at a low speed, and the transmittance is proportional to the decrease in speed. (Transparency) is also lowered and fade-in is displayed. This fade-in display period B23 is common to the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R.

After that, the decoration symbols in the decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are stopped and displayed all at once. In other words, the variable stop action and the loop action such as those in the first production mode and the second production mode are not executed, and the variable display is terminated as it is, and the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed together with the small pattern. After that, the next variable display can be started after a pattern fixing period (for example, 500 ms).

Further, the fade-out display period A21 when the scroll display is executed in the first effect mode is longer than the fade-out display period A23 when the scroll display is executed in the fourth effect mode or the rotating display in the third effect mode. In addition, the fade-out display period A22 when the scroll display is executed in the second effect mode is longer than the fade-out display period A21 when the scroll display is executed in the first effect mode (fade-out Display period A23<fade-out display period A21<fade-out display period A22 (see FIGS. 45A to 45C).

Further, when the variable display of decorative patterns is executed, the movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, and the frame lamp 9b are controlled based on the light emission control corresponding to the pattern of the high-bass music, and the rhythm, melody, and beat of the high-bass music. It emits light according to the output such as. Also, high bass music is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In the present embodiment, when the variable display of the decoration pattern is executed in the high bass state, the movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, and the frame lamp 9b are controlled based on the light emission control corresponding to the high bass music pattern. , the rhythm, melody, beat, etc. of a high-bass song are exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. 24B), the light emission pattern in the order of white, blue, and yellow is repeatedly executed based on the loop light emission control (see FIG. 24B) corresponding to the background pattern, and the background BGM is played from the speakers 8L and 8R. You may make it output. By doing so, the light emission control of the effect control CPU 120 can be simplified.

(Operation example of customer waiting demonstration)
Next, the customer waiting demonstration effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 and 47. FIG. FIG. 46 is a diagram showing an operation example of the customer waiting demonstration effect. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an operation example when a starting prize is generated during the customer waiting demonstration effect.

As shown in FIG. 46, the "customer waiting demonstration effect" is an effect in which a customer waiting (game standby) state is notified. , is an effect started by the effect control CPU 120 when a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) elapses without receiving a control command such as a variable display start designation command.

Specifically, although not shown, after the initial motion of the movable bodies 32A and 32B is executed in the initial motion control process when the power is turned on, the menu/sound volume/light amount adjustment display suggestion display 002SG480 is displayed. is displayed (see FIG. 46(A)). Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has passed without the variable display being performed after the power is turned on, the menu/sound volume/light amount adjustment display suggestion display 002SG480 disappears, and the customer waiting demonstration image 002SG400 is displayed. It is displayed, and the customer waiting demonstration effect is started (see FIG. 46(B)).

In the customer waiting demo production, after a moving image introducing a plurality of friendly characters (which may include enemy character images) appearing in various productions and the contents of the content in order is displayed (Fig. 46(B)- (E)), the movable body 32A descends from the origin position to the performance position while the image of the group of allied characters is displayed (see FIG. 46(F)), and after a predetermined time elapses, it rises to the origin position. (See FIGS. 46(G) to (H)), the first background image 002SG081 corresponding to the normal state is displayed as the background image, and the process ends (see FIG. 46(I)). When the customer waiting demonstration effect ends, a menu/sound volume/light amount adjustment display suggestion display 002SG480 is displayed (see FIG. 46(J)).

When a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) elapses without the variable display being performed after the customer waiting demonstration effect is finished, the customer waiting demonstration effect is started again. Even after that, as long as the waiting state continues, the customer waiting demonstration effect is performed periodically. The customer waiting demonstration effect may be repeatedly executed a plurality of times in the standby state, or may not be executed after being executed a predetermined number of times. Also, the production mode of the customer waiting demonstration production as the waiting production is arbitrary and can be changed in various ways.

Further, during the execution period of the customer waiting demonstration effect (see FIGS. 46(B) to 46(H)), the small symbols are continuously stopped and displayed in the display area 5S, while the decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, Decorative patterns are not displayed on 5R. In this way, the small symbols are displayed even when the decoration symbols are not displayed, so that the player can be made to recognize that the variable display is in a stopped state.

An operation example in the case where a starting prize is generated while such a customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed will be described.

As shown in FIG. 47(A), when the first start winning occurs (the conditions for starting the variable display are met) while the customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed, as shown in FIG. 47(B) , variable display of small symbols is started in the display area 5S in a state where the customer waiting demonstration effect image 002SG400 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 47(C), the customer waiting demonstration effect image 002SG400 is hidden, the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, and the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. . In addition, the special figure reservation storage display area 5U and the active display area 5F are displayed, and the first reservation display 002SG101 is displayed in the first display area from the left of the special figure reservation storage display area 5U. Then, the movement display (shift display) from the special figure reservation storage display area 5U of the first reservation display 002SG101 to the active display area 5F is started, and the variation start action of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R is left, Starts in order from right to middle.

As shown in FIG. 47(D), when the shift display of the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display area 5F ends, as shown in FIG. The symbols move upward in order, the fluctuation start action ends, and the scroll display starts (see FIG. 47(F)).

In this way, when the starting winning occurs while the customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed, the variable display of the small patterns is started before the customer waiting demonstration effect image 002SG400 is hidden, and then the customer waiting is performed. After the demonstration effect image 002SG400 is hidden and switched to the background image corresponding to the effect mode at that time (here, the first background image 002SG081 corresponding to the first effect mode), the decoration pattern is displayed. Scroll display is started.

That is, if the scrolling display of decorative patterns is started while the customer waiting demonstration effect image 002SG400 is being displayed, it is difficult for the player to understand that the scrolling display has started with the occurrence of the first start winning. While starting the variable display of, after switching display from the customer waiting demonstration effect image 002SG400 to the first background image 002SG081, the scroll display is started after the shift display of the pending display is finished. It is possible to make the player recognize that the scroll display has started with the occurrence of the first start winning. On the other hand, when the customer waiting demonstration effect image 002SG400 is switched to the first background image 002SG081 and the scroll display is started after the shift display ends, the time lag from the occurrence of the first start winning to the start of the scroll display is large. Therefore, the variable display of the small symbols is started before the customer waiting demonstration effect image 002SG400 is hidden, so that the display corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbols can be ensured.

Also, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 46A, 46I, and 46J, after the customer waiting demonstration effect is completed, decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In the case of the first effect mode or the second effect mode when the state is reached, the loop action (see FIG. 23(C)) of the decoration pattern that is stopped and displayed is executed, and the main lamp 9a and the frame Loop light emission control (see FIG. 24B) is executed for the lamp 9b and the movable lamp 9d. On the other hand, in the case of the third effect mode or the fourth effect mode, the loop action (see FIG. 23(C)) of the ornamental pattern that is stopped and displayed is not executed, and the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the movable body lamp are not executed. In 9d, light emission control is executed in accordance with the rhythm, melody, time signature, etc. of the high bass music.

In this way, in the low base state, the loop action of the decorative pattern is repeatedly executed in a cycle shorter than that of the loop light emission control. That is, while it is possible to promote the resumption of the game, in the high base state, since neither the loop action of the decorative pattern nor the loop light emission control is executed, the production during the high base (third production mode and fourth production mode) can be brought to your attention that is being executed. It is not necessary to execute the loop action of the decoration design in the first production mode or the second production mode, or the loop action of the decoration design may be executed in the third production mode or the fourth production mode.

In addition, the loop action of the decoration pattern is not executed while the variable display is stopped in the high base state. Therefore, there is no need to appeal to the player to take a seat just because the pachinko game machine 1 is in a non-operating state, which is not variably displayed. Suppressed.

In addition, although the "loop action" of the present embodiment is focused on "movement", for example, the position of the decorative pattern changes, shakes, or deforms. However, animation or the like may be performed in which the highlight is moved and displayed in the decoration pattern while it is still displayed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the third background image 002SG083, the fourth background image 002SG084, character images, and other effect images (not shown) displayed as background images in the high-bass state are displayed in accordance with the high-bass music. Alternatively, the background image may be displayed as an animation such that the background image is displayed moving at a predetermined moving speed. In this case, while the variable display is stopped in the high base state as described above, although the loop action of the ornamental pattern is not executed, the animation display of the third background image 002SG083 and the fourth background image 002SG084 is continued. can be

(Example of operation of pseudo consecutive notice)
Next, an example of the operation of the pseudo consecutive notice will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing the flow of pseudo consecutive notices. FIG. 49 shows (A) a diagram showing an example of pseudo-run count display and symbol colors, (B) a diagram showing pseudo-run count display and symbol color types, and (C) a pseudo-run count display color determination table. FIG. 10 shows.

As shown in FIG. 48, the "pseudo recurring notice" indicates that the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined timing from when the variable display of the decorative symbols is started until the display result is derived and displayed, and then the variable display is started. This is an effect that prompts whether or not to resume, that is, whether or not one variable display is simulated as multiple variable displays.

As shown in FIG. 49(A), the pseudo-continuous notice includes a "pseudo-continuous one-time pattern" in which the total number of times of variable display is two, the first time variable display and one re-variable display, and the first time variable display and two times. It is possible to execute a "pseudo consecutive 2 times pattern" in which the total number of times of variable display is 3 times with re-variable display, and when the variation pattern of super reach (pseudo consecutive 1 time) is selected The "pseudo-run 1-time pattern" is executed, and when the super reach (pseudo-run 2-time) variation pattern is selected, the "pseudo-run 2-time pattern" is executed. Incidentally, the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher in the "pseudo-run 2-time pattern" than in the "pseudo-run 1-time pattern".

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48(A), when the variable display in which the pseudo consecutive notice is executed is started, the left decoration symbol display area A decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, and then a decorative pattern having the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R to enter a ready-to-win state. Afterwards (see FIG. 48(B)), the pseudo-continuous decoration pattern with the characters "NEXT!" ).

After that, in the case of the variable display in which the pseudo-continuous notice is executed, the pseudo-continuous decoration pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the center decoration symbol display area 5C (see FIG. 48(D)), and the first variable display is performed again. is started, that is, a pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212 of "x2" indicating that the second variable display is started is displayed above the center decoration symbol display area 5C (see FIG. 48(F)). , the left decorative design display area 5L, the middle decorative design display area 5C, and the right decorative design display area 5R, the variable display of decorative designs is resumed (see FIG. 48(G)). In addition, in the case of variable display in which the pseudo-continuous notice is not executed, the pseudo-continuous symbol passes through the stop position in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C, and one of the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C. A decorative pattern with a large number is displayed in a stopped state, and a variable display result of failure is displayed (see FIG. 48(E)).

In FIG. 48(G), after the variable display of decorative patterns is resumed, in the case of the pseudo-continuous notice of "pseudo-continuous one-time pattern", after a predetermined time has elapsed, the variable display is performed in the left decorative design display area 5L. 48(L)), and a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily stopped in the left decorative design display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative design display area 5R. 48(M)), and develops into SP reach performance.

In addition, after the variable display of decorative symbols is resumed in FIG. 48(G), in the case of the pseudo-continuous notice of "pseudo-continuous two-time pattern", the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L, and then. , The decorative pattern with the same number as the one temporarily stopped in the left decorative design display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative design display area 5R. The pseudo-continuous decoration pattern displayed with is decelerated and displayed before the stop position in the middle decoration design display area 5C (see FIG. 48(H)).

Next, the pseudo-continuous decoration pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the middle decoration design display area 5C (see FIG. 48(I)), and the second re-variable display is started, that is, the third variable display is started. After the pseudo run number display 002SG213 of "x3" indicating that the display is started is displayed above the middle decoration design display area 5C (see FIG. 48(J)), the left decoration design display area 5L and the middle decoration are displayed. The variable display of the decoration design is restarted in the design display area 5C and the right decoration design display area 5R (see FIG. 48(K)).

After that, the decorative design that has been variably displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 48(L)), and the decoration with the same number as the decorative design temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L. The symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decoration symbol display area 5R to enter the ready-to-win state (see FIG. 48(M)), and the SP ready-to-win effect is developed.

In addition, the pseudo-continuous notice is an introductory part as a period to instigate whether or not the variable display will be resumed (Fig. 48 (A) to (C), (G), (J), (K), (L) reference), and a result notification part (see FIGS. 48(D) to (F), (H), (I), and (M)) as a period for notifying the result of whether or not the variable display has been restarted. .

As shown in FIG. 49B1, in the pseudo continuous notice, the variable display is resumed when the variable display is resumed after the pseudo continuous decoration symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the center decoration symbol display area 5C. A pseudo-run count display is displayed that allows you to specify the number of times you have played. Specifically, the pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212 (FIGS. 48(F) and (G)) of "×2" indicates that the first re-variable display is started, that is, the second variable display is started. ), or a pseudo consecutive number display 002SG213 (see FIGS. 48(J) and 48(K)) that indicates that the second re-variable display is started, that is, that the third variable display is started. ) is displayed.

The pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212 shown in FIG. 49B1 and the pseudo consecutive number display 002SG213 shown in FIG. 49B2 are sometimes displayed in blue and sometimes in red. In addition, as described in FIG. 19, the even-numbered normal symbols are "blue", and the odd-numbered odd-numbered symbols are "red". The display color of such a pseudo-repeated number display is determined using the pseudo-repeated number display color determination table shown in FIG. be.

Specifically, in steps 002SGS278 and 002SGS280, when the display color of the pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212 is determined, when the variable display result is "probable variable big hit", the symbol color of the decoration pattern determined in step 002SGS276 is used. A display color that is not the same color (for example, the symbol color is blue and the pseudo-running number display color is red/the symbol color is red and the pseudo-running number display color is blue) is determined at a rate of 10%, and is determined in step 002 SGS276. A display color that is the same as the pattern color of the decorated pattern (for example, the pattern color and the pseudo-running number display color are blue/the pattern color and the pseudo-running number display color are red) is determined at a rate of 90%.

Further, when the variable display result is "unprobable variable jackpot", a display color that is not the same color as the decorative pattern color determined in step 002 SGS276 (for example, the pattern color is blue and the pseudo consecutive number display color is blue). Red/symbol color is red, pseudo-running number display color is blue) is determined at a rate of 30%, and a display color that is the same as the symbol color of the decorative pattern determined in step 002 SGS276 (for example, symbol color and pseudo Blue for the consecutive number display color/red for the pattern color and pseudo consecutive number display color) is determined at a rate of 70%.

Further, when the variable display result is "miss", a display color that is not the same color as the decorative pattern color determined in step 002 SGS276 (for example, the pattern color is blue and the pseudo-running number display color is red/ The symbol color is red and the pseudo-run number display color is blue) is determined at a rate of 90%, and the display color (for example, the symbol color and the pseudo-run number) is the same color as the symbol color of the decorative symbol determined in step 002SGS276. The display color is blue/the symbol color and the pseudo-run number display color are red) is determined at a rate of 10%.

As described above, in the pseudo consecutive notice, the display colors of the temporarily stopped decorative symbol and the pseudo consecutive number display are the first combination of non-identical colors, and the temporarily stopped decorative symbol and the pseudo consecutive number display are the first combination. There is a case where the display color is the second combination of the same color, and the case where the variable display is resumed with the second combination is more favorable than the case where the variable display is resumed with the first combination in the pseudo-continuous notice. The ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state is high.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a big hit, when the normal symbol (blue) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002 SGS276, the number of pseudo-runs of the first pseudo-run and the second pseudo-run is displayed as follows. The rate of determination of the same color blue is higher than the rate of determination of the non-same color red. On the other hand, when the variable display result is out, when the normal symbol (blue) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002SGS276, the same color is used as the pseudo-run number display for the first and second pseudo-runs. A blue color is determined less frequently than the non-identical color red.

In addition, when the variable display result is a big hit, when the probability variable symbol (red) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002 SGS276, the same color is used as the pseudo-run number display for the first pseudo-run and the second pseudo-run. A red color is determined more frequently than a non-identical blue color. On the other hand, when the variable display result is lost, when the probability variable symbol (red) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002 SGS 276, the same color is displayed as the number of pseudo-runs for the first and second pseudo-runs. A red color is determined less frequently than a non-identical blue color.

Furthermore, when the variable display result is a big hit, when the normal symbol ("2", blue) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002SGS276 (see FIG. 49(B1)), the pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212 is changed to " For the first pseudo run of "x2", the second combination ("x2", blue) in which the decoration symbol temporarily stopped and the number of the pseudo run number display 002SG212 and the display color are the same type of blue are displayed. This is determined at a higher rate than the first combination ("x2", red) in which the decoration symbol temporarily stopped and the number of the pseudo-running number display 002SG212 are of the same type, but the display color is red. .

In addition, for the second pseudo-run where the pseudo-run number display 002SG213 is "x3", the decoration symbol temporarily stopped and the number of the pseudo-run number display 002SG212 are different, but the display color is the same kind of blue. The 3 combination ("x3", blue) is better than the 4th combination ("x3", red) in which the decoration symbol temporarily stopped and the number and display color of the pseudo consecutive number display 002SG213 are red. Determined by a high percentage.

On the other hand, when the variable display result is a failure, when the normal symbol ("2", blue) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002SGS276, the number of pseudo-runs of the first and second pseudo-runs is displayed. , the rate at which blue, which is the same color, is determined is lower than the rate at which red, which is the non-same color, is determined.

In the case where the variable display result is a big hit, when the probability variable symbol ("3", red) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002SGS276, the pseudo-run number display 002SG212 becomes "x2" for the first pseudo-run. , the decoration symbol temporarily stopped and the number of the pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212 are different, but the third combination ("x2", red), which is the same kind of display color and is red, is displayed temporarily stopped. It is determined at a higher rate than the fourth combination ("x2", blue) in which the display color is different from the numbers of the decorative symbols and the number of pseudo-running display 002SG212.

In addition, for the second pseudo-run where the pseudo-run number display 002SG213 is "x3", the second combination ("x 3", red) is better than the first combination ("x3", blue) in which the decoration symbol temporarily stopped and the number of the pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212 are the same type, but the display color is different blue. Determined by a high percentage.

On the other hand, when the variable display result is lost, when the normal symbol ("3", blue) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002 SGS276, the number of pseudo-runs of the first and second pseudo-runs is displayed. , the rate at which blue, which is the same color, is determined is lower than the rate at which red, which is the non-same color, is determined.

As described above, in the pseudo consecutive notice, the numbers of the temporarily stopped decorative symbols and the numbers of the pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212 and 002SG213 are of the same type, and the display colors of the temporarily stopped decorative symbols and the pseudo consecutive number display are different. There are cases where it is the first combination, and cases where both the decoration symbol displayed temporarily and the number and display color of the pseudo-running number are the same type, and the first combination is the first combination in the pseudo-running notice. Whether or not the pseudo continuous notice is executed by increasing the ratio of control to the jackpot game state when the variable display is restarted with the second combination than when the variable display is restarted with the second combination. In addition, when executed, it is possible to draw attention to the combination of numbers and colors of the decorative symbols displayed temporarily and the numbers and colors of the pseudo consecutive number displays 002SG212 and 002SG213, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

Further, in the pseudo-run announcement, the ratio of control to the big win game state is higher when the super reach variation pattern of two pseudo-runs is determined as the variation pattern than when the super reach variation pattern of one pseudo-run is determined. , The decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the second pseudo-run are more likely to be displayed in the second pseudo-run than when both the decorative symbols temporarily stopped in the first pseudo-run and the number and display color of the pseudo-run number display are the same second combination. and the second combination of the same type in both the number and the display color of the number of pseudo-runs, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher. It is possible to attract attention by the number of times displayed and the display color.

Also, in the second pseudo run, if both the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and the number and display color of the pseudo run number display are the same type of second combination, the decorative design becomes a variable pattern, so it is simulated as a variation pattern. The ratio of control to the probability variable big win game state may be higher when the super reach variation pattern of two pseudo-reams is determined than when the super reach variation pattern of one ream is determined.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display color of the pseudo consecutive number display is exemplified by determining one of a plurality of colors according to the number of the ornamental symbol displayed temporarily, but the present invention is not limited to this. The display color of the display of the number of pseudo-runs is not limited, and may be a display color that is predetermined for each number of pseudo-runs.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as the display mode of the pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212, 002SG213, the form of "x2" or "x3" was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Display of the number of repetitions can be changed in various ways as long as the number of pseudo repetitions can be specified. It can be displayed in various forms such as.

In the present embodiment, in the pseudo consecutive notice, the number of the temporarily stopped decorative symbol and the number of the pseudo consecutive number display are of the same type and the same color only when the temporarily stopped decorative symbol is displayed. is a normal symbol (“2”, blue) and the number of pseudo-runs is indicated by 002SG212 (“x2”, blue) There were two patterns in the case of the number of times display 002SG213 (x 3, red), but in addition to the above, the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed is the normal pattern ("4", green), and the pseudo consecutive number display (x 4) , green) may be used, and the number color of the decoration pattern, the number color of the number of pseudo-runs, and the number of pseudo-runs can be changed variously.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the pseudo consecutive notice, even if the number of the decoration symbol temporarily stopped and displayed is a number other than "2" or "3" corresponding to the number of the pseudo consecutive number display, the pseudo consecutive notice It is decided whether or not the consecutive number display color should be the same color as the number of the decoration symbol displayed temporarily. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the numbers of the decoration symbols temporarily stopped and displayed are numbers other than "2" and "3" corresponding to the numbers of the pseudo consecutive number display. In some cases, a predetermined display color (for example, white) may be uniformly determined without determining the pseudo-running number display color.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the pseudo consecutive notice, the decorative symbols of the same number as the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L are temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative design display area 5R to enter the reach state. After that, the pseudo-continuous decoration pattern with the characters "NEXT!" The present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode of the pseudo-continuous pattern can be changed in various ways. In addition, after a decorative design with a different number from the decorative design temporarily displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative design display area 5R, the left decorative design display area 5L or the right decorative design display area 5R. The re-variable display may be started by temporarily stopping and displaying the decoration pattern or the pseudo-continuous decoration pattern temporarily stopped at the stop position in the middle decoration design display area 5C.

Incidentally, the decoration symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the decoration symbol display areas 5L and 5R in the pseudo consecutive notice may not necessarily be the same as the fixed decoration symbols stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display. Further, for example, after the normal symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the first pseudo-run, the probability variable symbols, that is, different symbols from the first pseudo-run may be temporarily stopped and displayed in the second pseudo-run. Also, the number of pseudo-runs is not limited to the above two times, and three or more pseudo-runs (re-variable display) may be executed.

(Operation example of reach production)
Next, an operation example of the ready-to-win effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52. FIG. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing the flow of the ready-to-win effect. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing the flow of the ready-to-win effect following FIG. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an operation example of each part in the ready-to-win effect. In the following, an operation example of the ready-to-win effect in the first effect mode will be explained, but the same ready-to-win effect may be executed in the second to fourth effect modes as well.

As shown in FIG. 50(A), when the variable display based on the normal reach fluctuation pattern or the super reach fluctuation pattern is started, at the timing when a predetermined period has passed since the variable display was started, the left decoration symbol display area 5L The decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 50(B)), and then the decorative design with the same number as the decorative design temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative design display area 5R. Then, the mode of variable display of the decoration pattern becomes a predetermined ready-to-win mode, and the ready-to-win effect is started (see FIG. 50(C)). At this time, decoration designs are displayed at high speed in the middle decoration design display area 5C. Also, the movable body lamps 9d of the movable bodies 32A and 32B are lit based on the aforementioned loop light emission control (see FIG. 24(B)).

In FIGS. 50(B) and (C), the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed in this order, but the present invention is not limited to this. , and the left and right decorative design display areas 5L and 5R may be temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time.

As shown in FIG. 50(D), when the ready-to-win effect is started, the decoration symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decoration design display area 5L and the right decoration design display area 5R are enlarged and displayed, and the middle decoration design is displayed. A reach line effect display 002SG250 as a reach line suggesting image is displayed so as to be superimposed on the ornamental pattern (substantially transparent and invisible) being variably displayed in the area 5C, and the reach line suggesting effect is started. The reach line effect display 002SG250 is a display emphasizing the reach line connecting the decorative patterns temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop positions of the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R, and the middle decorative design is displayed on the reach line. This is a display suggesting that the decoration pattern in the area 5C will be stopped and displayed.

In FIG. 50(D), the decorative symbols temporarily stopped in the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R are enlarged only for the characters in the character display section 002SG052 as in the above-described fluctuation stop action. Instead of being displayed, the number display portion 002SG051, character display portion 002SG052, information display portion 002SG053, and base display portion 002SG054 forming decorative patterns are all enlarged and displayed at the same ratio. In this manner, by providing an enlarged display that is different in mode from when the variable display is stopped, it is possible to make the user recognize that the variable display is not stopped but in the ready-to-reach mode.

The reach line effect display 002SG250 is displayed in a small size so as to be superimposed on the decorative pattern being variably displayed near the stop position in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C when the ready-to-reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 50(D). 50(E)), and after reaching the left and right sides of the display screen (see FIG. 50E) 50 (F)), after the aspect changes so that the vertical dimension expands (see FIG. 50 (G)), the transmittance (transparency) gradually increases due to fade-out display (see FIG. 50 (H)), and finally 51(I)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 50(F), in the reach line suggestive effect, it is possible to change (enlarge) the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250, and to change the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250. When changing, turning off the movable body lamps 9d of the movable bodies 32A and 32B arranged around (near) the display screen of the image display device 5 makes the surroundings of the display screen darker than usual. , the reach line effect display 002SG250 can be made more conspicuous.

Further, as shown in FIG. 50(D), after the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R are enlarged and displayed, the left decorative design is moved to the left and the right decorative design is displayed. The decorative patterns start moving rightward, that is, in a direction away from each other (see FIG. 50(E)). In addition, while being separated from each other, they are rotated by a predetermined angle around the rotation axis facing the vertical direction (see FIG. 50(F)), and when they reach the most separated position on the left and right of the display screen, the movement and rotation display are completed. 50(G)).

After that, as shown in FIG. 50(H), the left and right decorative patterns displayed at the left and right separated positions while being enlarged are reduced and rotated from the separated positions toward the decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R. moved and restored to its normal viewing position.

Then, as shown in FIG. 51(I), when the decorative patterns are restored in the decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and the reach line effect display 002SG250 is erased and becomes non-display, the middle decorative pattern display area 5C is variably displayed. The scroll display speed gradually decreases, and the transparency (transparency) gradually decreases to fade-in the decorative patterns (see FIGS. 51(J) to (K)). Finally, the decorative patterns become transparent. The rate becomes 0% (opaque), and scroll display is performed at a low speed (see FIG. 51(L)).

As shown in FIG. 52, when executing the reach line suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 enlarges and enlarges the decorative symbols temporarily stopped in the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R. , and a separation display in which the decorative pattern is separated after the enlarged display is executed, and the separation display is started and ended before the first period td1 from the start to the end of the enlarged display. Since the second period te1 until the game is played is longer (td1<te1), the player can be made to recognize the decoration pattern forming the ready-to-win state.

In addition, the period td2 from the start of the enlarged display to the end of the enlarged display is longer than the period tf1 until the enlarged decorative pattern is restored to the original figure (td2 < tf1 ), while allowing the player to recognize the decoration pattern forming the ready-to-win state, it can be quickly reduced in size when restored to prepare for the next performance.

In addition, when the decorative patterns temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R are enlarged and displayed, attention is paid to which decorative design is stopped and displayed in the middle decorative design display area 5C. Since the left and right dimensions are narrowed and it becomes difficult to visually recognize the variable display of the decorative patterns, the left and right decorative patterns are moved away from each other. It is possible to make the user pay attention to the decorative design in the middle decorative design display area 5C.

In addition, the reach line effect display 002SG250 has been exemplified in a form displayed immediately after the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R, and the ready-to-win mode is achieved. It is not limited to this, and may be displayed at the same time as the ready-to-reach mode.

Also, the movable body lamp 9d displays the decorative patterns temporarily stopped in the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R, and after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is displayed, the reach line effect display 002SG250 is displayed. Although the form in which the lights are turned off when changing has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lights may be turned off simultaneously with the display of the reach line effect display 002SG250. Further, the luminance is not limited to being extinguished, and the luminance may be lowered more than when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 is changing.

Further, in the present embodiment, the movable bodies 32A and 32B provided above and below the image display device 5 are provided with built-in specific light emitting means that are turned off when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 is changing. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of board-side lamps including an attacker lamp 9c provided on the game board, and a main lamp 9a provided on the game machine frame 3 , frame lamps 9b, etc., and particularly if the lamps are provided near the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the display screen of the image display device 5, the reach line effect display 002SG250 is made conspicuous by turning off the lamps. be able to.

In addition, after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is executed, the transmittance (transparency) of the decoration pattern being displayed in the middle decoration design display area 5C is set higher than the first transmittance F1 before the reach line effect display 002SG250 is executed. The second transmittance F2 with a low transmittance (transparency) is set to the timing after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is erased from the center decoration design display area 5C, and is displayed variably in the center decoration design display area 5C. The decorative pattern inside does not interfere with the display of the reach line effect display 002SG250.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is erased from the middle decoration design display area 5C, the transmittance of the decoration design in the middle decoration design display area 5C gradually decreases (fade-in display). However, the present invention is not limited to this. After the display 002SG250 is erased from the center decoration design display area 5C, the transmittance may change to the second transmittance F2 after a predetermined time has passed.

(Operation example of SP reach production)
Next, an operation example of the SP ready-to-win effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55. FIG. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing the flow of the SP ready-to-win effect. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing the flow of the SP ready-to-win effect following FIG. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an operation example of each part in the SP ready-to-win effect.

As shown in FIG. 53(A), in the variable display of the super reach variation pattern when it is controlled to the low base state, after becoming the reach mode described in FIG. 50(C), the type of SP reach production The reach title display 002SG070 is displayed to notify the reach title, and the SP reach performance as a notification effect to notify whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) ) is started (see FIGS. 53B and 53C). In the SP reach effect, a fifth background image 002SG085 representing the universe corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed, which is different from the first background image 002SG081 and the second background image 002SG082 which are normal background images. In addition, the fifth background image 002SG085 may be an image having a different aspect according to the type of the SP ready-to-win effect.

Next, during the period from the timing when the battle is settled until the predetermined operation validity period elapses, an operation promotion display 002SG071 consisting of characters "Press!!" prompting the operation of the push button 31B and a button display imitating the push button 31B. 002SG072 is displayed (see FIG. 53(D)).

Then, when the operation of the push button 31B is detected within the operation effective period, or when the operation is not detected and the operation effective period elapses, the operation prompting display 002SG071 and the button display 002SG072 are hidden, and the process ends. . When the result of the variable display is a big hit, the movable body lamp 9d lights up in a predetermined luminescent color while the movable body 32B rises from the origin position to the performance position, and an effect display 002SG073 that emphasizes the movable body 32B is displayed. At the same time, a predetermined production effect sound is output, and it is informed that the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state (see FIG. 53(E)).

Next, after a result display (not shown) indicating that the ally character has won the battle against the enemy character is displayed, the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed as the background image. , a combination of jackpot confirmed symbols (for example, "222") is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 53(F)).

Then, as shown in FIG. 53(G), with the end of the SP ready-to-win effect, the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden, the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, and the first background image 002SG081 is displayed. A combination of jackpot confirmation symbols (for example, "222") is temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, a character 002SG074 appears with a lit ignition device in hand, and after displaying a frame-in from the lower right side of the display screen, it runs toward the left and temporarily appears in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The number display portions 002SG051 of the decorative symbols that are stopped are lit (see FIG. 53(H)).

As shown in FIG. 55(A), a specific image 002SG075 showing a flame displayed by being ignited at a predetermined position on the periphery of the number display portion 002SG051 of each pattern is shown in FIGS. 55(B) to 55(D). , it increases along the periphery of the number display portion 002SG051 and is displayed near the number of the number display portion 002SG051. Further, as for the flame image forming the specific image 002SG075, as shown in the middle enlarged view of FIG. By doing so, the movement is displayed as if the flame is swaying. Finally, the specific image 002SG075 is hidden, the small symbols and each decorative symbol are stopped, and the big hit display result is derived and displayed (see FIG. 53(J)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a failure, the movable body 32B does not rise from the origin position to the effect position, and after the result notification display 002SG078 indicating that the ally character has lost the battle with the enemy character is displayed. (See FIG. 53(K)) In the notification effect, when the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP ready-to-win effect is displayed as the background image, a combination of confirmed symbols that are not a big hit combination (for example, "232 ”) is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 53(L)).

Then, as shown in FIG. 53(M), with the end of the notification effect (SP ready-to-win effect), the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden, the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, and the first background image 002SG081 is displayed. is displayed, a combination of deviated confirmed symbols (for example, "232") is temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, the small symbols and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed without the specific image 002SG075 being displayed, and the result of the display of the deviation is derived and displayed (see FIG. 53(N)).

In addition, in the variable display of the super reach variation pattern in the case of being controlled to the high base state, after the notification effect of notifying that it is controlled to the big hit game state is performed (see FIG. 53 (E)), When the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed as the background image in the notification effect after the result display (not shown) indicating that the character has won the battle with the enemy character is displayed. At the same time, a combination of big hit confirmed symbols (for example, "222") is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 54(O)).

Then, as shown in FIG. 54(P), with the end of the notification effect (SP ready-to-win effect), the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden and the fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed to display the fourth background image 002SG084. is displayed, the combination of the big hit confirmed symbols (for example, "222") is temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, each decorative symbol is stopped and displayed without displaying the specific image 002SG075, and the big hit display result is derived and displayed (see FIG. 54(Q)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a failure, the movable body 32B does not rise from the origin position to the effect position, and after the result notification display 002SG078 indicating that the ally character has lost the battle with the enemy character is displayed. (See FIG. 53(K)) In the notification effect, when the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP ready-to-win effect is displayed as the background image, a combination of confirmed symbols that are not a big hit combination (for example, "232 ”) is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 54(R)).

Then, as shown in FIG. 54(S), with the end of the notification effect (SP ready-to-win effect), the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden and the fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed. is displayed, a combination of deviated confirmed symbols (for example, "232") is temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, the small symbols and each decorative symbol are stopped and displayed without the specific image 002SG075 being displayed, and the result of the display of the deviation is derived and displayed (see FIG. 54(T)).

In this way, in the low base state, the specific image 002SG075 is displayed in operation on the number display portion 002SG051 of the jackpot confirmed decoration pattern displayed after the end of the notification effect. (See FIGS. 53(H) and (I)), in the high base state in which the average variable display period is short, the specific image 002SG075 is not displayed in operation on the decorative design number display portion 002SG051 displayed after the end of the notification effect. (see FIG. 54(S)), it is possible to give a sense of speed to the variable display.

In the present embodiment, in the low base state, a specific image 002SG075 showing flames is displayed in close proximity to the numerical display portion 002SG051 of the combination of the jackpot confirmed decorative symbols displayed after the end of the SP ready-to-win effect. Although the form was exemplified, the specific image is not limited to the specific image 002SG075 showing flames as described above, and images other than flames (for example, light, water, effects, characters, items, etc.) may be applied. good.

In addition, the movement display of the specific image may include not only the manner in which the flames fluctuate as described above, but also the specific image rotating around the number display portion 002SG051, or changing in form or display color. .

Further, in the present embodiment, the character 002SG074 acts on each of the decoration symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in each of the decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, so that the specific image 002SG075 is displayed around the number display portion 002SG051. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific image is displayed without affecting the decoration symbols temporarily stopped in the decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. may be displayed.

(Modification 2)
Next, Modification 2 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 56, (A1) to (A7) are diagrams showing Modification 2 of the present invention.

In the variable stop action in the above embodiment, the characters displayed in the character display section 002SG052 are enlarged and displayed when the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop positions of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after passing through the stop positions of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, the decorative design moves in the opposite direction and is restored to the stop position. may be moved and displayed.

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 56A1 and 56A2, the decorative pattern is displayed at a reduced speed toward the stop position, and gradually moves downward in the direction of the white arrow until it reaches the stop position. When the temporary stop display is made (see FIG. 56A3), the pedestal display portion 002SG054 and the information display portion 002SG053 remain temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position, and the number display portion 002SG051 and the character display portion 002SG052 pass through the stop position. Then, the downward movement display is continued.

At this time, the movement distance L2 from when the number display portion 002SG051 passes the stop position until the temporary stop display is displayed is the movement distance from when the character display portion 002SG052 passes the stop position until the temporary stop display is displayed. It is larger than L1 (L1<L2).

After that, the number display portion 002SG051 and the character display portion 002SG052 that have passed the stop position move upward, and while the character display portion 002SG052 is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position (see FIG. 56A5), the character display portion 002SG052 The display unit 002SG052 passes the stop position again and moves upward (see FIG. 56(A6)). In this way, the movement distance L3 from when the number display portion 002SG051 passes the stop position upward until the temporary stop display is displayed is (L3<L2). Finally, the number display portion 002SG051 moves downward and is temporarily stopped at the stop position (see FIG. 56 (A7)).

Note that the action in which only the character display portion 002SG052 passes through the stop position and moves upward in FIG. It can be made to recognize the difference from the start action.

In this way, when the decorative pattern reaches the stop position, it is not temporarily stopped and displayed at the timing of arrival, but after at least a part of the plurality of seed display parts forming the decorative pattern has passed the stop position, the reverse display is performed. By moving to the side and returning to the stop position, it is possible to make it look as if a part of the display has passed by with momentum, so it can be made more realistic.

In addition, while the first display unit (for example, the base display unit 002SG054 and the information display unit 002SG053) among the plurality of display units is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position, the other second display unit (for example, the number display unit 002SG051 and By causing the character display portion 002SG052) to pass through the stop position, movement can be given while the stop position is not ambiguous. Furthermore, by making the movement distances of the number display portion 002SG051 on one side and the character display portion 002SG052 on the other side of the second display portion different, it is possible to display the action according to the size and appearance of the display portion. .

(Modification 3)
Next, Modification 3 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 57(A) to (D) are diagrams showing a modification 3 of the present invention.

In the above-described embodiment, in the first effect mode, when the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, as shown in FIG. Although the decorative symbols before and after the stopped decorative pattern are not temporarily stopped and displayed, the present invention is not limited to this. Thus, when one of the decorative patterns (for example, decorative pattern "3") is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position, one of the preceding and following decorative patterns (for example, decorative pattern "2" and decorative pattern "4") The part may be temporarily stopped and displayed.

Then, when one of the variablely displayed decorative symbols (for example, the decorative symbol "3") is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position (see FIGS. 57A and 57B), the variation stop action is performed. In the case (see FIGS. 57C and 57D), the object to be subjected to the fluctuation stop action is the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position, and is temporarily stopped and displayed in an area other than the stop position. It is preferable not to execute the fluctuation stop action for the decoration pattern.

By doing so, when a winning combination, which is a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the result of the losing display, is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols, temporary stop display is performed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. By temporarily enlarging and displaying the displayed decorative patterns, the decorative patterns temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R can be made to attract the player's attention, and a combination that is originally meaningless to the player is derived. Even when the decoration pattern is displayed, the player's line of sight can be kept on the area where the decoration pattern is displayed. Further, when enlarging and displaying the temporarily stopped decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, the decorative patterns that are not positioned in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R are not displayed in an enlarged manner. It is possible to concentrate on the decorative patterns temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and reduce the load of display control.

In addition, since the loop light emission control is continuously performed even when the decorative patterns to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are enlarged and displayed (see FIGS. 42 and 43), the main lamp 9a and the frame lamp 9b, the control of the movable lamp 9d can be simplified. Incidentally, when a plurality of effective stop positions are set, the fluctuation stop action may be executed for the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed at each effective stop position.

(Other modifications)
Further, after the variable display mode becomes the ready-to-win mode, when it develops into the SP ready-to-win effect, the left and right decorative patterns forming the ready-to-win mode move to the front side of the display screen in a first predetermined operation, and Only the number display part 002SG051 may be moved to a predetermined position (for example, upper left and right sides of the display screen) on the display screen where the SP reach effect is displayed by a specific action including a second predetermined action of moving to the side. In this case, it is preferable that the moving speed of the decorative pattern is faster in the second predetermined motion than in the first predetermined motion.

In addition, when the variable display is stopped, the decorative patterns are the number display portion 002SG051 and the information display portion 002SG053. The information display unit 002SG053 may also be made capable of executing the information display variation start action in conjunction with the number variation start action of the number display unit 002SG051. In this case, the information display variation start action may be completed and the information display section 002SG053 may be erased before the number variation start action is completed.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the spirit of the present invention. include.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, it is possible to execute either the first effect mode or the second effect mode in the low base state, the third effect mode in the low probability high base state, and the fourth effect in the high probability high base state Although the form in which the mode can be executed has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to execute three or more types of production modes in the low base state, or three or more types of effects in the high base state. The mode may be made executable.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the first effect mode, the first scroll display in the vertical direction, in the second effect mode, the second scroll display curving and moving from the back side to the front side, in the third effect mode, the rotating display, and the fourth scroll display. Although the form in which the third scrolling display in the vertical direction is executed in the production mode has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the form of variable display of decorative patterns in each production mode can be changed in various ways. .

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, as an example of an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player, the form in which the jackpot game state is applied is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantageous state is a time-saving state or a variable probability state. , Small hit game state and the like may be applied.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the normal state and the low probability low base state, the special state with a short average variable display period and the low probability high base state and high probability low base state and the variable display is likely to be executed than the normal state However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the normal state may be a low-probability state, and the special state may be a high-probability state.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the normal state (low base state), the time saving state (low probability high base state), the probability variable state (high probability high base state) are provided as the game state, and the time saving state or probability change at the end of the big hit game Although the form in which the present invention is applied to the pachinko game machine 1 that can be controlled to the state is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and is a part of the case where the variable display result is wrong in the low probability state. Therefore, it is possible to control the time saving state based on the variable display result being displayed as a specific result, or it is advantageous in a low probability state after the end of the advantageous state or after clearing the RAM (cold start of the pachinko game machine 1) The present invention may be applied to a pachinko game machine that can be controlled to a time-saving state based on the execution of a predetermined number of variable displays without being controlled by the state. In this case, for example, the time-saving state controlled after the big hit game is the time-saving state A, and in a low-probability state after the end of the advantageous state or after clearing the RAM (cold start of the pachinko game machine 1), it is predetermined without being controlled to the advantageous state. The time saving state controlled based on the number of times the variable display is performed is the time saving state B, a part of the case where the variable display result is lost in the low probability state, and the variable display result is displayed as a specific result. The time saving state controlled based on what is done should be the time saving state C.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine that can be controlled in the time-saving state C, a plurality of types of variable display results are provided for winning the time-saving state C, and depending on the type of variable display result when winning the time-saving state C You may vary the variable display frequency|count by which time saving control is performed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is used as an example of a gaming machine. In addition, one game is completed by deriving a variable display result to a variable display device capable of variable display of a plurality of types of individually identifiable symbols, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines in which prizes can be generated. In the case of a slot machine, the normal state corresponds to non-AT state, the advantageous state corresponds to big bonus, regular bonus, assist time (AT), and the special state corresponds to assist time (AT).

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to enclosed gaming machines, slot machines, etc., in which game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. Also, the game machine capable of playing a game is at least one that performs a game, and is not limited to a pachinko game machine or a slot machine, and may be a general game machine.

As described above, the display control of the moving display of the decoration identification information when the variable display of the specific identification information is executed has been described. may suggest. In this case, a character may be additionally used on the image display device to indicate the suitability in the form of the character. By doing so, winning and non-winning can be communicated in an easy-to-understand manner, and interest is improved. Specific control will be described below.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 58 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 58), a variable display (also called a special game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

In addition, the "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronism is generically called simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the number of first reserved memories is displayed, and the second reserved display 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 59). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 58, four places on the lower left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 59). Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning gate door is in the ON state, the big winning gate door opens the big winning gate, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big winning gate. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 58). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 58) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area by the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 59).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 59).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern winning pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern winning". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, when a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol varies depending on the type of the big hit to be described later) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by turning on/off, operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) is a "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of the ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. In addition, during the small-hit game state, some of the big-hit types (in the big-hit type of the big-hit game state in the same manner as the small-hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in which the subsequent game state is a high probability state) By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is mounted with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. 59, for example. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11. FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 60, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for progressing the game (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.), but also the states of backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backed up data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main substrate 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that designates the game state before the power cut that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that designates the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the restoration time from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. Display the screen for The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flow chart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 61 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). CPU103 by executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state and small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 61 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting prize determination process, the process of detecting the occurrence of the starting prize, storing pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of pending memories is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the generation of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination to the effect control board 12 is performed. . The effect control command at the time of start winning set to be transmitted in this manner is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the condition for starting the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "minor hit" or "losing", when the time-saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting a round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is a "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit execution count, and a jackpot gaming state when the upper limit execution count is reached. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 63 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 63 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 64, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during the small hit of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . In addition, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. In addition, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7", and the effect processing during the big hit is finished.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big win game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinguishing of the pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, the ratio of one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".

(Description of Characteristic Portion 006IW)
Next, the characterizing portion 006IW of this embodiment will be described. In the characteristic portion 006IW, when the display result of the special symbol becomes "big win" and the game state is controlled to the big win game state, after the big win game state is finished, the variable probability state is controlled. This definite variable state is a condition for ending that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times, and is a so-called cut-off definite variable state. In this example, the expression "the result of the lottery is won" may be used, but this means that the display result of the special symbol game is "big hit", that is, the random number for determining the display result in the special symbol normal process. Based on this, the display result of the special pattern is determined (predetermined), and the determined result is a "jackpot". Also, in this example, the expression "the result of the lottery is not won" may be used, but this means that the display result of the special symbol game is "losing", that is, the random value for determining the display result in the special symbol normal process It means that the display result of the special pattern is decided (predetermined) based on, and the decision result is "losing".

(Variation pattern table)
FIGS. 65-1 and 65-2 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of variation pattern tables in the characteristic part 006IW. Among them, FIG. 65-1(A) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table for losing used in the low probability state. Also, FIG. 65-1(B) shows a specific example of a variation pattern table for big wins used in the low probability state. Also, FIG. 65-2(A) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table for losing used in the high probability state. Also, FIG. 65-2(B) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table for big wins used in the high probability state.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 65-1 (A), in the case of deviation in the low probability state, the variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation), the variation pattern PA1-2 (shortened variation), the variation pattern PA2 -1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (long reach) and fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach A) is determined as one of the fluctuation patterns.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 65-1 (B), in the case of a big hit in the low probability state, the variation pattern PB2-1 (normal reach), the variation pattern PB2-2 (long reach) and the variation pattern PB2 -3 (super reach A) is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 65-2 (A), in the case of deviation in the high probability state, the variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation), the variation pattern PA1-2 (shortened variation), the variation pattern PA2 -1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (long reach) and fluctuation pattern PA2-4 (super reach B) is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 65-2 (B), in the case of a big hit in the high probability state, the variation pattern PB2-1 (normal reach), the variation pattern PB2-2 (long reach) and the variation pattern PB2 -4 (super reach B) is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 65-1 and 65-2, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of ready-to-win effects, and is configured so that the degree of expectation for a big hit increases in the order of normal reach<long reach<super reach.

Also, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 65-1 and 65-2, the type of Super Reach that can be executed is different between the low probability state and the high probability state, and the variable period (that is, effect period) is configured to be different. It is With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by providing variations in the presentation of the performance between the low-probability state and the high-probability state.

In this example, only super reach A can be executed as super reach in the low probability state, and only super reach B can be executed as super reach in the high probability state, but the configuration is not limited to this. , a plurality of types of super reach may be executed.

In addition, not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 65-1 and 65-2, for example, a variation pattern is provided in which the ready-to-win effect is executed after the pseudo continuous effect is executed once or more times, and the number of times of the pseudo continuous effect Depending on this, the degree of expectation for a big hit or the rate of development to a super reach with a high degree of expectation may be different.

(Variable display start setting process)
Next, variable display start setting processing in the characteristic portion 006IW will be described. FIG. 65-3 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step 006IWS801).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display result (stop pattern) is determined, and data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern is stored in the decorative design display result storage area (step 006IWS802).

At step 006 IWS 802, when the display result specifying command indicating "missing" is received, the effect control CPU 120 selects a missing pattern in which the left, middle, and right decorative patterns do not match at all or left and right decorative patterns (specifically, normal color determines a combination of reach-lost symbols in which only white "1" to "6" and "8" to "9" normal decorative symbols match. In addition, when a display result specifying command indicating a "big hit" is received, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns (specifically, the normal colors of white "1" to "6" and "8" to "9") are displayed. A combination of patterns with all the normal decoration patterns) is determined.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation pattern includes super reach (step 006IWS803). Then, if the fluctuation pattern does not include super reach, the process proceeds to step 006 IWS808.

When the variation pattern includes super reach, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the game state is a high probability state (step 006IWS804). Then, if it is not in the high probability state, the process proceeds to step 006 IWS808. Whether or not the game is in the high probability state can be confirmed by, for example, storing information that can specify the game state based on the received command and referring to the information in step 006IWS804.

In the case of the high probability state, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the powerful RUSH mode (step 006IWS805). When the current production mode is "powerful RUSH mode", it is determined to execute a super reach (powerful RUSH) production, and the process proceeds to step 006IWS808. On the other hand, if the current production mode is not the "powerful RUSH mode", that is, if it is the "patto attack mode", it is determined to execute the super reach (patto attack) production, and the process proceeds to step 006 IWS808.

In this example, a "powerful RUSH mode" and a "pato pato attack mode" are provided as production modes in the high probability state. In addition, the player can decide which of the production modes to use as the production mode in the high-probability state (details will be explained later in the production mode determination process). In step 006 IWS805, referring to the information that can specify the performance mode stored in the performance mode determination process, it is confirmed which performance mode is set. In addition, in this example, it is configured so that the production mode can be selected when it is in a high probability state, but not limited to such a configuration, a game that is more advantageous than the normal state (low probability / low base state) State, for example, time-saving state (low probability / high base state) or so-called small hit rush state (high probability / low base state), etc., when the game state, the production mode is configured to be selectable. may

Also, in this example, when it is in a high probability state, it is possible to execute a super reach (powerful RUSH) effect and a super reach (patto attack) effect as effects for notifying success or failure, and either one depending on the effect mode is configured to run

Also, in this example, the super reach (powerful RUSH) effect and the super reach (patto attack) effect are effects executed based on the same variation pattern. For example, when the variation pattern PA2-4 or variation pattern PB2-4 shown in FIG. 65-2 is determined, if the production mode is a powerful RUSH mode, super reach (powerful RUSH) production is executed, and the production mode is patopato In the attack mode, a super reach (patto attack) effect is executed. Therefore, when the super reach (powerful RUSH) effect is executed based on one variation pattern, and when the super reach (Patopato Attack) effect is executed based on the one variation pattern, from the start of variation The period until the fluctuation end is the same. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65-2, when the super reach (powerful RUSH) effect or the super reach (Patopato Attack) effect is executed based on the variation pattern PA2-4, the variation is 80 seconds. When super reach (powerful RUSH) effect or super reach (patto attack) effect is executed based on pattern PB2-4, the duration is 100 seconds. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute a plurality of effects based on the same variation pattern, and to impress an announcement using a patrol lamp (details will be described later) in one of the effects.

In this example, when the probability is high, either the super reach (Patopato Attack) effect or the super reach (powerful RUSH) effect is executed according to the effect mode. The player is prompted to press 31B, and based on the fact that the pressing operation has been performed (or the fact that the action promotion period has elapsed), it is configured to notify the success or failure. However, for example, the player is urged to perform repeated hitting operations instead of pressing operations, and based on the repeated hitting operation that satisfies a predetermined execution condition (or the action promotion period has elapsed), the success or failure is announced. You may allow In this case, for example, by determining either the pattern of the pressing operation or the pattern of the repeated hitting operation at different ratios according to the result of the variable display, the degree of expectation can be made different for each, and interest can be improved. can.

It should be noted that a plurality of types of conditions may be provided for success/failure notification for repeated hitting operations (if the conditions are not met, success/failure notification is not performed until the action promotion period elapses). For example, in a case where the action promotion period is 4 seconds, the first judgment timing with a remaining period of 3.5 seconds and the remaining period of 2 seconds are used as judgment timings for judging whether the condition is satisfied. Three determination timings, that is, a second determination timing and a third determination timing having a remaining period of 1 second, are provided in advance. Further, for example, whether or not the pressing operation has been performed 30 times is associated with the first determination timing as a first determination condition, and whether or not the pressing operation has been performed 20 times is associated with the second determination timing as a second determination condition. Correlation: Whether or not the pressing operation has been performed five times is associated with the third judgment timing as a third judgment condition. Then, in the variable display start setting process, when it is determined that the super reach (Patopato Attack) effect or the super reach (powerful RUSH) effect is to be executed according to the repeated hit operation pattern, a lottery is conducted to decide which judgment timing and judgment conditions. Decide whether to combine

In such a configuration, if the effect is executed in the pattern of repeated hitting operations based on the combination of the first determination timing and the first determination condition, the second operation promotion period is 3.5 seconds remaining after the start of the action promotion period. At one determination timing, it is determined whether or not the pressing operation has been performed 30 times. On the other hand, if the pressing operation has not been performed 30 times at the first determination timing, no notification of success or failure is made at the first determination timing, and notification of success or failure is made at the timing when the action promotion period has elapsed. Further, for example, if an effect is executed in a pattern of repeated hitting operations based on a combination of the second determination timing and the second determination condition, the pressing operation is performed at the second determination timing with a remaining period of two seconds after the start of the action promotion period. It is determined whether or not the pressing operation has been performed 20 times, and if the pressing operation has been performed 20 times, it is determined that the execution condition is satisfied, and the result is notified. On the other hand, if the pressing operation has not been performed 20 times at the second determination timing, no notification of success or failure is made at the second determination timing, and notification of success or failure is made at the timing when the action promotion period has elapsed. Further, for example, if an effect is executed in a pattern of repeated hitting operations based on a combination of the third determination timing and the third determination condition, the pressing operation is performed at the third determination timing with one second remaining after the start of the action promotion period. It is determined whether or not the pressing operation has been performed five times, and if the pressing operation has been performed five times, it is determined that the execution condition is satisfied, and the result is notified. On the other hand, if the pressing operation has not been performed five times at the third determination timing, the success/failure notification is not performed at the third determination timing, and the success/failure notification is performed at the timing when the action promotion period has elapsed.

For the determination timing and determination condition combination lottery for the continuous hitting operation, for example, by determining different ratios according to the result of the variable display, the degree of expectation can be varied and the interest can be improved. Hereinafter, with respect to repeated hit operations, satisfying a determination condition at a decision timing is also referred to as performing a repeated hit operation that satisfies an execution condition.

In this example, the period during which the player's operation on the push button 31 is effectively detected is called an action valid period, and the period for prompting the player to operate the push button 31 is also called an action promotion period. In addition, in this example, the operation promotion period starts when the operation valid period starts, and the operation promotion period ends when the operation valid period ends. Therefore, the operation valid period and the operation promotion period can be read interchangeably. However, it is not limited to such a configuration. For example, after a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has passed since the start of the operation valid period, the operation promotion period is started, and a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has passed since the operation valid period ends. ), the action-promoting period may end earlier. In this case, the part describing that the predetermined process is executed at the timing when the action promotion period ends may be replaced with the description that the predetermined process is executed at the timing when the action valid period ends, or the operation may be performed as it is. A predetermined process may be executed when the promotion period ends.

At step 006IWS808, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the content of the variation pattern and the determined effect (step 006IWS808).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 006IWS809).

The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect devices (parts for effect) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Specifically, data related to changing the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. In addition, the process timer set value is set with a variable time in the mode of variation. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table, and performs control to display the decoration pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value. Also, the process table is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80 . Also, the process table is prepared according to each variation pattern.

In addition, in the process table used when performing the effect control for the variation pattern involving the ready-to-win effect, the left symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has passed. Process data indicating to display is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbols, the temporary stop symbols in the simulated run and the sliding effect. may

In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the production device (the image display device 5 as the production component, the production component as the Various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts are controlled (step 006IWS810). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

By executing the processing of step 006 IWS 810, an effect corresponding to the variation pattern and the content determined to be executed is realized.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 006IWS811).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172) (step 006IWS812).

(Production mode decision processing)
Next, the effect mode determination process executed in the ending effect process in the characteristic portion 006IW will be described. FIG. 65-4 is a flow chart showing an example of the effect mode determination process executed in the ending effect process.

In the effect mode determination process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is during the effect mode determination period during which the effect mode can be determined by the player operating the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B (step 006IWS901). . Then, if it is not during the performance mode determination period, the performance mode determination processing is terminated as it is.

If it is during the effect mode determination period, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not an operation to the stick controller 31A is detected (step 006IWS902). When the operation is detected, the effect control CPU 120 displays an image corresponding to the effect mode "powerful RUSH mode" displayed on the image display device 5 and an image corresponding to the effect mode "Patopato attack mode". is selected according to the operation, and the selected image is highlighted (step 006IWS903).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not an operation on the push button 31B has been detected (step 006IWS904). When the operation is detected, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode corresponding to the selected image highlighted on the image display device 5 (step 006IWS906). In step 006 IWS 906, information that can specify the determined production mode is stored. After that, the production mode determination process is terminated.

When the operation of the push button 31B is not detected, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is time to end the effect mode determination period (step 006IWS904). When it is not the end timing, the effect mode determination processing is terminated as it is, and when it is the end time, the effect mode corresponding to the selected image highlighted on the image display device 5 is determined (step 006 IWS 906), Terminate the production mode determination process.

(Production example)
Next, specific examples of effects will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the super ready-to-win (battle) effect executed in the low probability state will be described with reference to FIGS. 65-5 to 65-13. It should be noted that screen transitions are assumed to occur in the ascending order of (1), (2), and (3) in any of the figures.

(Super reach (battle) production performed in a low probability state)
FIGS. 65-5 to 65-13 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of super reach (battle) executed in a low probability state. In FIGS. 65-5 to 65-9 and 65-11 to 65-13 of FIGS. 65-5 to 65-13, effects are executed based on the variation pattern PB2-3 (super reach A) big hit. This is a specific example when FIGS. 65-5 to 65-7 and 65-10 out of FIGS. 65-5 to 65-13 are specific examples in which the production is executed based on the deviation of the variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach A) is.

In the example shown in FIGS. 65-5 to 65-13, after the lost pattern (“327”) is displayed as the display result of the previous fluctuation display on the image display device 5 (FIG. 65-5 (1)), the fluctuation pattern PB2-3 (super reach A) big hit or fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach A) starts the fluctuation display based on the loss (FIG. 65-5 (2)).

Next, when the right and left decorative symbols are "2" and the ready-to-win state is reached (Fig. 65-5 (3)), the normal ready-to-win effect is executed in which the middle decorative symbols are scrolled at a low speed, and then the image display device 5 whites out. , the advance notice effect is started (FIG. 65-5 (4)).

In the advance notice effect, the first teammate character image 006IWC01 first appears (Fig. 65-5 (4)), followed by the effect display in which the second teammate character image 006IWC02 appears (Fig. 65-5 (5)). . Next, an effect display is performed in which the character display of "development" is superimposed on the first teammate character image 006IWC01 and the second teammate character image 006IWC02 (FIG. 65-5 (6)). Next, the first mini-character image 006IWC04 is superimposed on the first ally character image 006IWC01, the second ally character image 006IWC02, and the character display of "development" (Fig. 65-5 (7)), and then the first mini-character image 006IWC04 is displayed. An effect display is performed in which the multiplied first mini-character image 006IWC04 is displayed so as to fill the screen (FIG. 65-5 (8)).

After that, when Super Reach (battle) starts, the multiplied first mini-character images 006IWC04 gradually disappear (Fig. 65-6 (9)), and eventually all the first mini-character images 006IWC04 disappear. is performed (FIG. 65-6 (10)). With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a sense of incongruity at the time of switching from the video of the advance notice effect to the video of the super ready-to-win, and to naturally show the series of flow from the advance notice effect to the super ready-to-win.

Next, the effect display is performed so that the second teammate character image 006IWC02 lands on the ground (FIG. 65-6 (11)), the upper body of the second teammate character image 006IWC02 is enlarged, and the second teammate character image 006IWC02 is displayed. A background image containing a plurality of stars corresponding to is displayed (FIG. 65-6 (12)).

Next, the second friend character image 006IWC02 and the enemy character image 006IWC11 face each other, and "VS" is displayed to suggest that a battle is about to start (FIG. 65-6 (13)).

Next, an effect display is performed in which the enemy character image 006IWC11 attacks the second friend character image 006IWC02 (specifically, light rays are output from the fingertips) (FIG. 65-6 (14)). At this time, the second teammate character image 006IWC02 is in such a state as to prevent attacks by using the center decoration symbol "9" (or the symbol image corresponding to the center decoration symbol "9") as a shield (Fig. 65-6 (14). ).

In this example, the decorative patterns are displayed in the order of ``1'', ``2'', ``3'', ``4'', ``5'', ``6'', ``7'', ``8'', and ``9''. shall be displayed in order. In the example shown in FIGS. 65-5 to 65-12, the left and right decorative patterns are "2" and the reach mode is set. This is the middle decoration pattern displayed two before the middle decoration pattern "2" which is the combination of the jackpot patterns "222".

Next, an effect display is performed in which the enemy character image 006IWC11 attacks the second ally character image 006IWC02 (specifically, light beams output from the fingertips) to destroy the center decoration symbol "9" serving as a shield. At this time, the center decoration pattern "9" is destroyed (Fig. 65-6 (15)). Then, the second teammate character image 006IWC02 is enlarged and displayed, and a background image including a plurality of stars corresponding to the second teammate character image 006IWC02 is displayed (FIG. 65-6 (16)).

Next, an effect display is performed in which the second teammate character image 006IWC02 starts attacking (specifically, punches) the enemy character image 006IWC11 (FIG. 65-7 (17)). Then, the opposing enemy character image 006IWC11 is displayed from the front (FIG. 65-7 (18)), and an effect display is performed in which the center decoration pattern "1" appears in front of the enemy character image 006IWC11 (FIG. 65-7 ( 19)). The center decoration pattern "1" serves as a shield that prevents the second friend character image 006IWC02 from attacking the enemy character image 006IWC11. 65-7 (20)).

In addition, the center decoration symbol "1" displayed in FIG. 65-7 (19) is a center decoration symbol displayed immediately before the center decoration symbol "2" which is the combination of the jackpot symbols "222". Therefore, when the center decoration symbol "1" displayed in FIG. 65-7 (19) is destroyed and the next center decoration symbol "2" is displayed, it is notified that a big win will occur.

When the attack by the second ally character image 006IWC02 reaches the center decoration pattern "1" (Fig. 65-7 (20)), the effect image displayed until immediately before is displayed with reduced brightness and saturation. , and a cut-in effect in which the teammate character image 006IWC01 and a plurality of star-shaped images (with normal or high brightness and saturation) are superimposed and displayed (FIG. 65-7 (21)). Then, when the image displayed by the cut-in effect is erased, the same effect display as immediately before the cut-in effect (FIG. 65-7 (20)) is performed again (FIG. 65-7 (22)).

At this point, the decision button effect is started, and a push button image 006IWG03 imitating the push button 31B and a display indicating the operation effective period are displayed superimposed on the effect display that was displayed immediately before (Fig. 65-7 (23 )). That is, the effect display for prompting the push button 31B to be pressed is started.

In the case of the variation pattern PB2-3 (super reach A) big hit, when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected, the background image of the radial pattern is displayed on the image display device 5 after FIG. 65-7 (23). (24) in FIG. 65-8, and the movable body effect is executed in which the movable body 32 moves from the initial position to the effect position in front of the image display device 5 ((25) in FIG. 65-8). Next, the movable body 32 stops at the effect position on the front surface of the image display device 5 for a predetermined period (FIG. 65-8 (26)).

After that, the movable body 32 is controlled to return from the performance position to the initial position, the attack from the second friend character image 006IWC02 to the enemy character image 006IWC11 becomes effective, and the middle decoration pattern "1" serving as a shield is destroyed. At the same time, an effect display is performed in which the attacked enemy character image 006IWC11 is blown away (FIG. 65-8 (27)).

Next, the second teammate character image 006IWC02 is displayed in a jubilant manner (FIG. 65-8 (28)), and then the previous effect display including the second teammate character image 006IWC02 and the enemy character image 006IWC11 (FIG. 65-8 ( 28)) is superimposed on the image (FIG. 65-8 (29)), and the light effect image is enlarged to cover the second ally character image 006IWC02 and the enemy character image 006IWC11. (Fig. 65-8 (30)). At this time, since the light effect image is non-transmissive, the hidden second friend character image 006IWC02 and enemy character image 006IWC11 are not visible.

Next, after the light effect image covers the entire screen, an effect display is performed in which the jackpot symbol "222" including the center decoration symbol "2" displayed in the normal mode appears (FIG. 65-8 (31)). . Then, the jackpot symbol "222" is gradually enlarged and displayed (FIG. 65-9 (32)), and is enlarged and displayed so as to cover the entire screen (FIG. 65-9 (33)). After that, the jackpot symbol "222" is displayed in the same size as when normal variation was performed before establishment of ready-to-win, and is displayed so as to sway four times (FIG. 65-9 (34)).

Next, a performance display is performed in which the jackpot symbol "222" is temporarily hidden and the character display of "Completely settled" is displayed (FIG. 65-9 (35)). Then, the image display device 5 is whited out, the super ready-to-win (battle) effect is finished, and the same background image as when the normal fluctuation before the ready-to-win is established is displayed, and the jackpot pattern "222" is temporarily displayed. A stop display is displayed (Fig. 65-9 (36)). After that, the jackpot symbol “222” is stop-displayed (FIG. 65-9 (37)). It should be noted that in this example, the temporary stop display is not a mode in which the vehicle is completely stopped and displayed, but a mode in which the vehicle is displayed while slightly shaking.

When the variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach A) is out of range, the attack from the second friend character image 006IWC02 to the enemy character image 006IWC11 does not become effective after (23) in FIG. An effect display is performed in which the middle decoration pattern "1" is changed from the cracked state to the normal state again without being destroyed (FIG. 65-10 (38)).

Next, the enemy character image 006IWC11 is displayed in a pose in which both hands are raised diagonally (FIG. 65-10 (39)), and the center decoration pattern "1" is displayed superimposed on the enemy character image 006IWC11 (FIG. 65-10). (40)). Then, after the center decoration symbol "1", which is the losing combination, is displayed so as to shake four times, the image display device 5 is blacked out (FIG. 65-10 (41)), and the super ready-to-win (battle) effect ends. .

When the super ready-to-win (battle) effect ends, the same background image as when the normal fluctuation was performed before the ready-to-win is established is displayed, and the lost symbol "212" is temporarily stopped and displayed (Fig. 65-10 ( 42)). After that, the lost symbol "212" is stopped and displayed (FIG. 65-10 (43)).

(Fanfare effect executed in a low probability state)
Next, the fanfare effect executed in the low-probability state will be described. FIGS. 65-11 to 65-13 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of fanfare effect executed in the low probability state. It should be noted that screen transitions are assumed to occur in ascending order of (1), (2), and (3) in any of the figures.

When a big win is achieved in a low probability state, a fanfare effect is started after the big win symbols are stopped and displayed, for example, as shown in FIG. 65-9 (37). In the fanfare effect executed in the low-probability state, first, the image display device 5 displays a background image with a radiating pattern, and at the upper right part of the display area displays the characters "Right-handed" and an arrow pointing to the right. . Then, the character display "B" appears from the upper side of the display area of the image display device 5 (Fig. 65-11 (1)), and then the character display "B" moves to the center of the display area (Fig. 65-11(1)). 65-11(2)).

Next, the character display "B" moves to the left side of the display area of the image display device 5, and an effect display is performed in which the character display "O" appears from the upper right side of the display area of the image display device 5 (FIG. 65-11). (3)). Next, when the character display "O" moves to the center in the vertical direction of the display area, it then moves to the center in the horizontal direction, and the character display "B" fades out from the left part of the display area to the outside. is performed (Fig. 65-11 (4)).

Next, the character display "O" moves to the left side of the display area of the image display device 5, and an effect display is performed in which the character display "N" appears from the upper right side of the display area of the image display device 5 (FIG. 65-11). (5)). Next, when the character display "N" moves to the center in the vertical direction of the display area, it then moves to the center in the horizontal direction, and the character display "O" fades out from the left part of the display area to the outside. is performed (FIG. 65-11 (6)).

Next, the character display "N" moves to the left side of the display area of the image display device 5, and an effect display is performed in which the character display "U" appears from the upper right side of the display area of the image display device 5 (FIG. 65-11). (7)). Next, when the character display "U" moves to the center in the vertical direction of the display area, it then moves to the center in the horizontal direction, and the character display "N" fades out from the left part of the display area to the outside. is performed (FIG. 65-11 (8)).

Then, the character display "U" moves to the left side of the display area of the image display device 5, and the character display "S" appears from the upper right side of the display area of the image display device 5 (FIG. 65-12). (9)). Next, when the character display "S" moves to the center in the vertical direction of the display area, it then moves to the center in the horizontal direction, and the character display "U" fades out from the left part of the display area to the outside. is performed (FIG. 65-12 (10)). Next, on the image display device 5, an effect display is performed in which the character displays "U" and "S" are sequentially faded out so as to be pushed out from the left part of the display area (FIG. 65-12 (11)).

Next, on the image display device 5, an effect display is performed in which "ONU" in the character display "BONUS" is enlarged and a glowing effect image is displayed (FIG. 65-12 (12)). Next, on the image display device 5, an effect display is performed in which the entire character display "BONUS" and an effect image that shines around are displayed (FIG. 65-12 (13)).

Next, in the image display device 5, an effect display is performed in which the color of the image being displayed is reversed (FIG. 65-12 (14)), and then the color of the image being displayed is reversed again (that is, restored). An effect display is performed (FIG. 65-12 (15)).

Next, a part of an arrow image resembling a rightward arrow appears from the left side of the display area of the image display device 5, and is superimposed on the character display "BONUS" (that is, in a higher layer than the character display "BONUS"). , an effect display is performed to move toward the right side of the display area (FIG. 65-12 (16)). The arrow image is overlaid with the characters "Right Hit", and at the time shown in FIG. 65-12 (16), part of the arrow image and part of the characters "Right Hit" appear.

Next, in the image display device 5, the tip of the arrow image moves to the vicinity of the center of the display area (FIG. 65-13 (17)), and when the tip of the arrow image reaches the right end of the display area (FIG. 65-13 (18)) 65-13 (19). After that, when the rear end of the arrow image reaches the left end of the display area, an effect display is performed to move toward the right side of the display area again. )), and the effect display of hitting the right end of the display area and moving toward the left side of the display area so as to bounce back is repeated (FIG. 65-13 (21)).

(ending production)
Next, the effect executed in the big win game state and the ending effect for notifying the end of the big win game state will be described. FIG. 65-14 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the ending effect when a big win is achieved in a low probability state and the game state is controlled to a big win game state.

In this example, a round (round game) in which the big winning opening is opened in the jackpot game state is executed a plurality of times. When the first round is started, as shown in FIG. 65-14(1), a first teammate character image 006IWC01, a second teammate character image 006IWC02 and a third teammate character are displayed in the center of the display area of the image display device 5. The image 006IWC03 is displayed, the round display "ROUND1" indicating the current number of rounds is displayed in the upper left part of the display area, and the character display "Right hit" and an arrow image pointing to the right are displayed in the upper right part of the display area. In the lower right part of the area, an effect display is performed in which an acquired point display "00000" indicating points based on the game balls paid out as prize balls is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65-14 (2), when the game ball enters the big winning hole and the prize ball is paid out, an effect display is performed in which the acquired point display "00047" is displayed. After that, when the final round ends, the first teammate character image 006IWC01, the second teammate character image 006IWC02, and the third teammate character image 006IWC03 are displayed in the center of the display area of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 65-14(3). are displayed in a state of holding hands, a round display "FINAL" is displayed in the upper left part of the display area, and an acquired point display "00440" is displayed in the lower right part of the display area.

In this example, a powerful RUSH mode and a patrol attack mode are provided as production modes for the high-probability state. Then, when the high probability state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game state, a performance mode determination period is provided in which the performance mode can be determined before the end of the jackpot game state. An effect is performed to determine whether the effect mode should be set.

Specifically, when the final round ends (FIG. 65-14 (3)), it becomes a production mode determination period that is part of the ending production, and as shown in FIG. , the display area is darkened (for example, the background is switched to black), and the character display of "Select a mode!" is displayed. Behind the character display "Select a mode!" The second effect mode image 006IWG03b corresponding to the mode "Pato Pat Attack" is displayed in gray indicating that it is inactive.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65-14(5), the display area of the image display device 5 becomes bright again, and the first effect mode image 006IWG03a corresponding to the effect mode "Powerful RUSH" and the effect mode "Patopato Attack" An effect display is performed in which a second effect mode image 006IWG03b corresponding to , and a push button image 006IWG02 are displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 65-14(5), the first effect mode image 006IWG03a is selected from the first effect mode image 006IWG03a and the second effect mode image 006IWG03b. The mode image 006IWG03a is a colorful and enlarged highlighting that suggests the selected state, and the second effect mode image 006IWG03b is a gray display that suggests the non-selected state.

Here, when the player performs an operation of tilting the stick controller 31A to the right, as shown in FIG. The second effect mode image 006IWG03b is colorfully enlarged and emphasized to indicate that it is in the selected state. Then, when the player presses the push button 31B, the effect mode corresponding to the currently selected second effect mode image 006IWG03b is determined, and the effect mode determination period ends.

After that, as shown in Fig. 65-14 (7), the logo of the game machine maker is displayed, and then, as shown in Fig. 65-14 (8), the character display reads "Pachinko/Pachislot is moderately enjoyable." is displayed, and the ending effect in the jackpot game state ends.

(Super Reach (Patopato Attack) production)
Next, a description will be given of the super reach (Patopato Attack) effect that is executed as one of the super reach in the high probability state. FIG. 65-15 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of patrol lamps used in the super reach (patto patrol attack) effect.

FIG. 65-15(A) is a specific example showing a patrol trump image 006IWG01 and a second teammate character image 006IWC02 used in a super reach (patto attack) effect.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 65-15(A), a scene is provided in which a patrol card (a patrol card image 006IWG01) and a character (a second teammate character image 006IWC02) are in contact with each other. For example, the scenes shown in FIGS. 65-17 (11) to (12), FIGS. 65-18 (11) to (12′), FIGS. Applicable.

More specifically, the tool (patrol string image 006IWG01a) of the patrol card (patrol card image 006IWG01) is in contact with the character (second teammate character image 006IWC02). Also, in this example, a scene in which the character (second teammate character image 006IWC02) wears a patrol lamp (pattern image 006IWG01) is provided as a scene in which the patrol lamp is in contact with the character. For example, the scenes shown in FIGS. 65-17 (11) and 65-18 (11) correspond.

As described above, in this example, the patrol trump (patrol trump image 006IWG01) and the character (second ally character image 006IWC02) are in a close relationship, synergistically increasing their effects.

Also, in this example, there is a scene in which a patrol card (pattern card image 006IWG01) and a character (second teammate character image 006IWC02) are in contact with each other. , the color of the patrol card (the patrol card image 006IWG01), the color of the patrol card string (the patrol card string image 006IWG01a), and the hair color of the character (the second ally character image 006IWC02) are different from each other (or colors of different systems). It is configured.

In this example, as an expression of the state in which the patrol lamp and the character are in contact with each other, a form in which the character wears a corded hat-shaped patrol lamp is used. Various forms can be employed, such as a form in which a character wears a helmet to which a patrol lamp is adhered, and a form in which a band to which a patrol lamp is adhered is wrapped around the character's arm.

FIG. 65-15(B) is a specific example showing the display mode of the patrol trump image 006IWG01 used in the Super Reach (Patrol Attack) effect.

The left side of FIG. 65-15(B) shows a patrol lamp image 006IWG01 in a non-lighting mode (dark red mode), and the right side of FIG. 65-15(B) shows a lighting mode (red glowing mode). A patrol lamp image 006IWG01 is shown. As shown on the left side of FIG. 65-15(B), when the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in a non-lighting mode, it is displayed in dark red and in a non-lighting mode. On the other hand, as shown on the right side of FIG. 65-15(B), when the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in a lighting mode, it is displayed in a mode in which it glows red and emits light. Further, when the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 is continuously displayed in the lighting mode for a predetermined period, as shown in FIGS. , are displayed in a manner in which the direction of light emission rotates.

In this example, when Super Reach (Pato Pato Attack) is executed, the scene before the scene that announces whether it is a big hit or not (hereinafter, the scene that announces the success or failure is the announcement scene, and the scene before the announcement scene is The scene is also called a pre-announcement scene), the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in a non-lighting mode. After the pre-announcement scene, the patrol-trump image 006IWG01 is displayed in a lighting mode when a big win is announced in the announcing scene, and the patrol-trump image 006IWG01 is displayed in a non-lighting mode when a loss is announced. be done.

Therefore, it can be said that the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 in the lighting mode shown on the right side of FIG. It can be said that the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 in the non-lighting mode shown is a mode in which the jackpot is not announced (hereinafter also referred to as a non-notification mode).

Note that the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 in the non-lighting mode is a mode that does not notify that the jackpot is won, but when it is displayed in the scene before the notification, it still notifies that it is a jackpot or a loss. When it is displayed after the announcement scene, it means that it is not a big hit but a loss.

FIGS. 65-16 to 65-20 are explanatory diagrams showing a specific example of super reach (Patopato Attack) which is executed when the high probability state and the production mode "Patopato Attack" is set. Of FIGS. 65-16 to 65-20, FIGS. 65-16 to 65-17 (or FIG. 65-18) and FIG. This is a specific example of a case in which an effect is executed based on the variation pattern PB2-4 (super reach B) big hit after being hit. Of FIGS. 65-16 to 65-20, FIGS. 65-16 to 65-17 (or FIG. 65-18) and FIG. Variation pattern PA2-4 (super reach B) is a specific example of a case in which an effect is executed based on a deviation after being hit.

When the production mode "Patpat Attack" is selected when the jackpot game state ends, when the game in the high probability state is started after the jackpot game state ends, it is shown in FIG. 65-16 (1). The title of the production mode "Patopato Attack" is displayed like this. In the example shown in FIG. 65-16(1), a character display of "PATO PATO ATTACK" is displayed in the center of the display area of the image display device 5, and a plurality of patrol lamp images are displayed as the background image.

Next, on the image display device 5, the first teammate character image 006IWC01 on the right side of the display area and the third teammate character image 006IWC03 on the left side of the display area are displayed so as to face each other, and the patrol card image 006IWG01 is positioned between these characters. An effect display is performed (FIG. 65-16 (2)). In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 65-16(2), the upper limit of the number of fluctuations to be controlled to the high probability state is set to 100 times. The number of remaining fluctuations display "100 times remaining" indicating the number of remaining fluctuations is displayed.

Next, when the variation display of the variation pattern PA1-2 (shortened variation) is started, the decorative pattern in the lower right part of the display area of the image display device 5 and the small pattern in the upper center of the display area are displayed in a variable manner. Display is performed (FIG. 65-16 (3)). Then, the decorative pattern in the lower right portion of the display area of the image display device 5 and the small pattern in the upper central portion of the display area are displayed in combination with the missing pattern "154" (FIG. 65-16 (4)). At this time, the image display device 5 displays the number of remaining fluctuations "99 times remaining".

Next, when the variable display based on the variable pattern PA2-4 (super reach B) or the variable pattern PB2-4 (super reach B) is started, the patrol card image 006IWG01 shakes on the image display device 5, and the first ally character An effect display is performed in which the image 006IWC01 and the third teammate character image 006IWC03 notice an anomaly (FIG. 65-16 (5)). Then, in the image display device 5, the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 is temporarily contracted (FIG. 65-16 (6)), and the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 jumps up (FIG. 65-16 (7)). After that, the Super Reach (Patopato Attack) effect is started, so the effects shown in FIGS. I can say.

When Super Reach (Patopato Attack) is started, a title is displayed as shown in FIG. 65-17(8). Specifically, the title display includes a plurality of patrol-trump images 006IWG01 and a character display of "Patopato" related to the patrol, and the character display of "Patopato" related to the patrol is displayed larger than the other character displays "push chance". be done. With such a configuration, the patrol lamp can be strongly recognized by the player. Note that the example shown in FIG. 65-17(8) is not the only example. For example, only the character display "Patopato" may be displayed with an effect display or may be activated to be displayed in a more emphasized manner than the other character displays. You may do so.

In this example, at the start of the super reach (patrol attack) that uses the patrol card image 006IWG01 to announce the success or failure, as shown in FIG. By keeping the rotated decorative pattern as it is, it is possible to concentrate more on the patrol card image 006IWG01. Also, in this example, as shown in FIG. , a patrol card image 006IWG01, and a big win announcement with matching patterns, so that the player can be more impressed with the big win.

Next, on the image display device 5, the second teammate character image 006IWC02 is displayed (FIG. 65-17 (9)), followed by the falling patrol trump image 006IWG01 (FIG. 65-17 (10)), and then falling. The second teammate character image 006IWC02 wears the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 (Fig. 65-17 (11)).

Next, on the image display device 5, along with the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 and the second teammate character image 006IWC02, the push button image 006IWG02 and the character display "Push!" (Fig. 65-17 (12)). At this time, the second teammate character image 006IWC02 is displayed with a look full of expectation.

Here, a modification will be described in which continuous hitting operation of the push button 31B is required in Super Reach (Pato Pat Attack). FIG. 65-18 is an explanatory diagram showing a modified example in which repeated hitting operations are required in Super Reach (Patopato Attack). In the modified example shown in FIG. 65-18, the scenes of FIGS. ), a patrol lamp image 006IWG01 and a second teammate character image 006IWC02 are displayed together with a push button image 006IWG02 and the character display "Continuous Hit" as an action prompting display for prompting the player to repeatedly press the push button 31B. 65-18 (12'). At this time as well, the second teammate character image 006IWC02 is displayed with a look full of expectation.

Note that the patrol lamp images 006IWG01 shown in FIGS. 65-17 and 65-18 are both in a non-lighting mode. In the pre-announcement scenes shown in FIGS. 65-17 and 65-18, the image display device 5 uses a background image with a white-based color scheme.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 65-17(12) and 65-18(12'), the push button image 006IWG02 and the character display of "Press!" (or at least a position where a part of the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 overlaps in a visible state). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to both the existence of the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 and the existence of the action prompting display.

It should be noted that when the action prompting display is displayed, for example, the patrol lamp, the character, and the action prompting display may each operate. FIGS. 65-27 are explanatory diagrams showing a modification in which a patrol lamp image and a push button image are displayed in motion. In the example shown in FIG. 65-27, after the scene shown in FIG. The pressed part of the button image 006IWG02 is displayed in a state where it is not sunk (FIG. 65-27(1)), and then a movement display is performed in which the second teammate character image 006IWC02 wearing the patrol card image 006IWG01 moves to the left. At the same time, the depressed portion of the push button image 006IWG02 is displayed in a sunken state (FIG. 65-27 (2)). Then, again, the action display is performed in which the second teammate character image 006IWC02 wearing the patrol card image 006IWG01 moves to the right, and the depressed portion of the push button image 006IWG02 is displayed in a state where it does not sink (Fig. 65-27 ( 3)), and then, a second ally character image 006IWC02 wearing a patrol trump image 006IWG01 moves to the left, and the pressed part of the push button image 006IWG02 is displayed in a sunken state (Fig. 65-27(4)). In other words, the action display in which the patrol card image 006IWG01 and the second teammate character image 006IWC02 move left and right, and the action display in which the pressed portion of the push button image 006IWG02 sinks or returns to its original state, are displayed after the action promotion period of the push button 31B has passed. is repeated until

In the modification shown in FIG. 65-27, the motion of the push button image 006IWG02, the motion of the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 and the motion of the second teammate character image 006IWC02 are displayed so as not to be synchronized. Specifically, the push button image 006IWG02 is displayed so that the button portion is not depressed (Fig. 65-27 (1)) and is depressed (Fig. 65-27 (2)). The patrol lamp image 006IWG01 and the second teammate character image 006IWC02 are motion-displayed so as to repeatedly move to the right (FIG. 65-27(1)) and to the left (FIG. 65-27(2)). appears to be out of sync. With such a configuration, attention can be drawn to any display.

As shown in FIG. 65-17 (12) or FIG. 65-18 (12'), after the action prompting display prompting the player's action is displayed, when a predetermined action is performed (or when the action promotion period ends) ), variation pattern PB2-4 (super reach B) When super reach (patt attack) is executed based on the jackpot, as shown in FIG. The patrol lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in a lighting mode. In this scene, the second teammate character image 006IWC02 wearing the patrol card image 006IWG01 is not displayed, and only the patrol card image 006IWG01 is displayed. At this time, in conjunction with displaying the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 in the lighting mode, notification sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In this example, from when the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 shown in FIG. 65-19 (13) is displayed in the lighting mode, when the jackpot pattern shown in FIG. Until then, the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in a lighting mode in which the emitting direction of light is rotated by rotating the mechanism that emits light while shining red.

Next, on the image display device 5, the second teammate character image 006IWC02 wearing the lit patrol lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed with a surprised expression (FIG. 65-19 (14)). Also, at this time, in conjunction with the display of the second teammate character image 006IWC02 in the form of a surprised expression, a character voice sound corresponding to the character "Ha" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. For example, after the scene shown in FIG. 65-19(13) and before the scene shown in FIG. It may be displayed in the same facial expression mode as the scene.

Next, on the image display device 5, the second teammate character image 006IWC02 wearing the lit patrol lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed with a happy expression (FIG. 65-19 (15)). Also, at this time, in conjunction with the display of the second teammate character image 006IWC02 with a happy facial expression, a character voice sound of "yeah!" with a tone corresponding to the character is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, on the image display device 5, the second teammate character image 006IWC02 wearing the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 in the lighting mode is displayed in a mode of performing a happy motion (in this example, a motion of raising both hands and jumping) (Fig. 65- 19(16)). Also, at this time, in conjunction with the display of the second teammate character image 006IWC02 in a happy motion, a character voice sound of "wai, wai" with a voice tone corresponding to the character is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. .

Next, on the image display device 5, the big win pattern "222" is displayed superimposed on the second teammate character image 006IWC02 (Fig. 65-19 (17)), and the big win pattern "222" is gradually enlarged and displayed (Fig. 65-19 (18)), and soon the image is enlarged and displayed so as to cover the entire display area of the image display device 5 (FIG. 65-19 (19)). After that, on the image display device 5, the normal size jackpot symbol "222" is temporarily stopped and displayed (FIG. 65-19 (20)), and finally the jackpot pattern "222" is stopped and displayed (FIG. 65-19 ( 21)).

As shown in FIG. 65-19, when the big hit is announced, from the timing of the announcement (FIG. 65-19 (13)) until the big hit symbol "222" is stopped and displayed (FIG. 65-19 (21) ), the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 is always in a lighting mode, and is operatively displayed such that the direction of emitting light rotates. Further, in the scene shown in FIG. 65-19 where the big win is announced, the image display device 5 uses a background image with a red-based color scheme.

As shown in FIG. 65-17 (12) or FIG. 65-18 (12'), after the action prompting display prompting the player's action is displayed, when a predetermined action is performed (or when the action promotion period ends) ), when the super reach (patent attack) is executed based on the deviation of the variation pattern PA2-4 (super reach B), as shown in FIG. A second teammate character image 006IWC02 wearing a patrol lamp image 006IWG01 in a non-lighting state is displayed in a disappointing manner. Also, at this time, in conjunction with the disappointing display of the second teammate character image 006IWC02 wearing the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 in the non-lighting mode, a voice tone corresponding to the character, "I'm sorry, I'll do my best next time." !” is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, on the image display device 5, the first teammate character image 006IWC01 and the third teammate character image 006IWC03 before the start of the super reach (the patrol attack) face each other, and the patrol card image 006IWG01 is positioned between these characters. A performance display is performed, and a lost symbol "212" is displayed as a combination of decorative symbols in the lower right portion of the display area (FIG. 65-20 (23)). After that, a small symbol "212" is displayed in the upper part of the display area of the image display device 5 (FIG. 65-20 (24)), and the remaining variation number display "98 remaining times" is displayed in the lower right part of the display area. In the scene shown in FIG. 65-20 where the failure is announced, the image display device 5 uses a background image with a white-based color scheme.

In this example, in the pre-announcement scene, the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in a non-lighting mode (a dark red mode), and the second teammate character image 006IWC02 is displayed in a mode of expression full of expectation (Fig. 65-17 (12 ), see FIG. 65-18 (12′)), if the result of the lottery is winning, after the pre-announcement scene, the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in a lighting mode (red glowing mode) (FIG. 65-19 (13) ), and the second teammate character image 006IWC02 is displayed in a happy manner (see FIGS. 65-19 (15) and (16)). On the other hand, if the result of the lottery is a non-winning, after the pre-announcement scene, the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in a non-lighting mode (a dark red mode), and the second teammate character image 006IWC02 is displayed in a disappointing mode ( See Figure 65-20 (22)). With such a configuration, winning or non-winning can be conveyed in an easy-to-understand manner by changing the display mode of the character supplementarily while suggesting winning or not in the form of patrol lamps.

In this example, if the result of the lottery is winning, after the pre-announcement scene, the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in a lighting mode without displaying the character as shown in FIG. 65-19 (13). As shown in 65-19 (14) to (16), the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in a lighting mode, and the second teammate character image 006IWC02 is displayed in a happy mode. On the other hand, if the result of the lottery is that the player has not won the lottery, after the pre-announcement scene, as shown in FIG. displayed in a manner that With such a configuration, only the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 in the lighting mode is displayed without displaying the character when announcing the winning, so that the contents of the announcement can be made easy to understand.

In this example, if the result of the lottery is winning, after the scene shown in FIG. 65-19(13) and before the scene shown in FIG. After that, the second teammate character image 006IWC02 is displayed with a surprised facial expression (Fig. 65-19 (14)), a happy facial expression (Fig. 65-19 (15)), and a happy action. (16 in FIG. 65-19) may be displayed in order. With such a configuration, the facial expression of the character transitions to the facial expression that the player wants to hold, so that an environment that is easy for the player to tune in and enjoy can be provided.

In this example, the background image of the image display device 5 is the first color in the pre-announcement scene (white color scheme in this example). If the result of the lottery is not won, after the pre-announcement scene, the color of the same system as the first color (in this example, the color scheme of white) ). With such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize winning or non-winning from the change in the background color.

Also, in this example, in the pre-announcement scene, an action promotion display prompting the player to take action is displayed at a position where the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 can be visually recognized. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 65-17(12) and 65-18(12'), the push button image 006IWG02 and the character display of "press!" position (or at least a position where a portion of the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 overlaps in a visible manner). Then, when the result of the lottery is winning, the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in a lighting mode when the player performs an action during the action promotion period in which the action promotion display is displayed. Specifically, when the push button 31B is pressed in the state shown in FIG. 65-17 (12), or when the push button 31B is pressed repeatedly in the state shown in FIG. 65-19(13), and the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in a lighting mode. With such a configuration, winning or non-winning can be conveyed in an easy-to-understand manner by changing the display mode of the character supplementarily while suggesting winning or not in the form of patrol lamps. Further, by displaying the action prompting display at a position where the patrol lamp can be visually recognized, attention can be drawn to both the presence of the patrol lamp and the presence of the action prompting display.

In this example, the action-promoting display includes an image-promoting display simulating an object to perform an action and a text-promoting display using characters. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 65-17(12), 65-18(12'), and 65-27, the push button image 006IWG02 and the character display of "press!" . Both the image-promoting display and the character-promoting display are displayed so as not to completely cover the patrol lamp. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 65-17(12) and 65-18(12'), the push button image 006IWG02 and the character display of "press!" position (or at least a position where a portion of the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 overlaps in a visible manner). With such a configuration, the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 can always be noticed.

Also, in this example, an announcement sound is output in conjunction with displaying the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 in the lighting mode, and then the voice of the character is output. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65-19 (13), the notification sound is output in conjunction with displaying the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 in the lighting mode, and then in FIGS. 65-19 (14) to (16) As shown, character voices such as "Hah", "Yatta", and "Yay, yee" are output in voice tones corresponding to the characters. With such a configuration, by sequentially outputting the notification sound and the voice of the character, winning can be excited.

Further, in this example, when the result of the lottery is no winning, the sound corresponding to displaying the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 in the non-lighting mode is not output, but the voice of the character is output. For example, as shown in FIG. 65-20 (22), the sound corresponding to displaying the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 in the non-lighting mode is not output, and the character voice of the voice tone corresponding to the character "Sorry, let's do our best next time!" to output With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize the aspect of the patrol lamp image 006IWG01, that is, whether or not it is appropriate, depending on whether or not the notification sound is output. In the case of non-winning, no notification sound is output, but the voice of the character is output, thereby avoiding the situation where there is no sound and the player is getting too excited, and the disappointment of the player can be reduced. .

As for the period during which the notification sound and the voice of the character are output, for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in 65-19 (14) to (16), it is longer than the period for outputting character voices such as "Hah", "Yatta", and "Yay, yee" as the voice of the character. As shown in (16), the period for outputting each character voice such as "Hah", "Yatta", "Yay, Yay" in the voice tone corresponding to the character at the time of the big hit is as shown in Fig. 65-20 (22). In addition, it may be set to be longer than the period for outputting the character voice "Good luck next time!" With such a configuration, the announcement can be appealed by outputting the announcement sound, and the winning can be excited, and the appearance of the patrol trump image 006IWG01, that is, the right or wrong can be known by the presence or absence of the announcement sound output. . In the case of non-winning, no notification sound is output, but the voice of the character is output, thereby avoiding the situation where there is no sound and the player is getting too excited, and the disappointment of the player can be reduced. .

In this example, after the scene shown in FIG. 65-17 (12) or FIG. While there is a scene in which the image 006IWC02 is not displayed and only the patrol trump image 006IWG01 is temporarily displayed, such a scene is provided when a super reach (patto patrol attack) that results in a failure is being performed. No, but such scenes may be provided, for example, as shown in FIGS. 65-40.

FIGS. 65-40 are explanatory diagrams showing modified examples of the patrol trump image displayed when the winning is not won. In the modification shown in FIG. 65-40, after the scene shown in FIG. 65-17 (12) or FIG. is displayed (FIG. 65-40(1)).

65-20 (22), the image display device 5 displays the second teammate character image 006IWC02 wearing the unlit patrol lamp image 006IWG01 in a disappointing manner (FIG. 65-20). 40(2)). Also, at this time, in conjunction with the disappointing display of the second teammate character image 006IWC02 wearing the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 in the non-lighting mode, a voice tone corresponding to the character, "I'm sorry, I'll do my best next time." !” is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. After that, the effect display similar to that of FIGS. 65-20 (23) and (24) is executed (FIGS. 65-40 (3) and (4)).

65-40, when the size of the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in the lighting mode, the size of the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 is changed after the pre-announcement scene when the result of the lottery is non-winning. Larger than when displayed in lit mode. Specifically, the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 in the lit state after the winning announcement shown in FIG. Display size is large. Further, when the result of the lottery is non-winning, the display in the non-lighting mode after the pre-announcement scene is larger than the non-lighting mode in the pre-announcement scene. Specifically, the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 in the non-announcement mode after the deviation notification shown in FIG. 65-40(1) is the pre-notification scene shown in FIGS. The display size is larger than that of the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 in the non-announcement mode. With such a configuration, winning can be favorably appealed by enlarging the patrol lamp when announcing winning. In addition, even in the non-lighting mode, the non-winning scene can be easily recognized by making the scene appear larger than the scene before the announcement when notifying the non-winning.

(Super reach (powerful RUSH) production)
Next, the super reach (powerful RUSH) effect executed as one of the super reach in the high probability state will be described.

Figures 65-21 to 65-24 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of super reach (powerful RUSH) executed when the high probability state and the production mode "powerful RUSH". When the production mode "powerful RUSH" is selected when the jackpot game state ends, when the high probability state game is started after the jackpot game state ends, as shown in Fig. 65-21 (1) , the title of the production mode "powerful RUSH" is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 65-21(1), the characters "POWERFUL RUSH" are displayed in the center of the display area of the image display device 5, and the second mini-character image 006IWC05 is displayed in the lower left and lower right portions of the display area. It is

Next, as shown in FIG. 65-21 (2), the background image of the image display device 5 is switched to the background image for Powerful RUSH, and the decoration pattern (the display result of the previous variation "222") is displayed in the center of the display area. be done. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 65-21(2), the upper limit of the number of fluctuations controlled to the high probability state is set to 100 times. The number of remaining fluctuations display "100 times remaining" indicating the number of remaining fluctuations is displayed.

Next, when the variation display of the variation pattern PA1-2 (shortened variation) is started, the decoration pattern in the central part of the display area of the image display device 5 and the small pattern in the upper part of the display area are variably displayed. Display is performed (FIG. 65-21(3)). Then, the decorative pattern in the lower right portion of the display area of the image display device 5 and the small pattern in the upper center portion of the display area are displayed in combination with the missing pattern "154" (FIG. 65-21 (4)). At this time, the image display device 5 displays the number of remaining fluctuations "99 times remaining".

Next, when the variable display based on the variable pattern PA2-4 (super reach B) or the variable pattern PB2-4 (super reach B) is started (FIG. 65-21 (5)), the image display device 5 performs the second A cut-in image including the teammate character image 006IWC02 and the character display "This sign!?" is superimposed and displayed (FIG. 65-21 (7)), and then an effect display is performed in which the cut-in image disappears (FIG. 65-21 (8)). Since super reach (powerful RUSH) is started after this, the effects of FIGS.

Next, when the left and right decorative patterns "2" are in the reach state (Fig. 65-22 (9)), and when the middle decorative patterns "1" and "2" are displayed (Fig. 65-22 (10)), A push button image 006IWG02 and a character display "Push!" are displayed as an action prompting display (FIG. 65-22 (11)).

Then, as shown in FIG. 65-22 (11), after the action promotion display prompting the player's action is displayed, when the pressing operation is performed (or when the action promotion period ends), the variation pattern PB2-4 ( Super reach B) When super reach (powerful RUSH) is executed based on the big win, the big win symbol "222" is temporarily stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 65-22 (12). On the other hand, when super reach (powerful RUSH) is executed based on the variation pattern PA2-4 (super reach B) loss, as shown in FIG. After that, as shown in FIG. 65-22(14), the lost symbol "212" is stopped and displayed.

Here, a modification will be described in which continuous hitting operation of the push button 31B is required in super reach (powerful RUSH). FIG. 65-23 is an explanatory diagram showing a modified example in which repeated hitting operations are required in super reach (powerful RUSH). In the modification shown in FIG. 65-23, after the scene of FIG. 65-21(8), as shown in FIG. , a light effect image including character displays "Consecutive hit challenge" and "Light up FEVER" is displayed. Next, along with the second teammate character image 006IWC02, the push button image 006IWG02 and the character display "FEVER" are displayed as an action prompting display for prompting the player to repeatedly press the push button 31B. '' is changed to a lighting mode (FIG. 65-23 (16)). In the scene shown in FIG. 65-23(16), only the character "F" of the character display "FEVER" has changed to glow.

Then, when super reach (powerful RUSH) is executed based on the variation pattern PB2-4 (super reach B) jackpot, in response to repeated hitting operations satisfying the execution conditions (or during the action promotion period) 65-23 (17)), all the characters of the character display "FEVER" are changed to glowing, and the second teammate character image 006IWC02 is displayed in a pleasing manner (Fig. 65-23 (17)). . On the other hand, when super reach (powerful RUSH) is executed based on the variation pattern PA2-4 (super reach B) deviation, all the characters of the character display "FEVER" are displayed according to the end of the action promotion period An effect display is performed in which the second teammate character image 006IWC02 is displayed in a disappointing manner while the light is not illuminated (FIG. 65-23 (18)). Then, the lost symbol "212" is temporarily stopped and displayed (FIG. 65-23 (19)), and then the lost symbol "212" is stopped and displayed (FIG. 65-23 (20)). In addition, in the modified example in which continuous pressing of the push button 31B is required in the super reach (powerful RUSH) shown in FIG. 65-23 (15), the transition to a scene in which the character display "continuous hit challenge" or the like is displayed. After the scene in which all the decorative patterns shown are displayed in a variable manner, the reach mode is set in which the left and right decorative patterns are aligned, and then the character display "Continuous Hit Challenge" shown in Fig. 65-23 (15) is displayed. You may make it Also, in this case, the reduced decoration pattern may be displayed in a ready-to-win mode during the continuous hit challenge.

65-22 (12) or FIG. 65-23 (17), the background image of the radial pattern is displayed on the image display device 5, and the movable body 32 is displayed from the initial position. A movable body effect of moving to the effect position on the front of the device 5 is executed (FIG. 65-24 (21)). Next, the movable body 32 is stopped at the effect position on the front surface of the image display device 5 for a predetermined period (FIG. 65-24 (22)), and thereafter the movable body 32 is controlled to return from the effect position to the initial position (FIG. 65- 24(23)).

Next, the second mini-character image 006IWC05 is displayed in the lower left and lower right portions of the display area of the image display device 5, and the jackpot symbol "222" is displayed in the center of the display area (FIG. 65-24 (24)). , the jackpot symbol "222" is gradually enlarged and displayed (FIG. 65-24 (25)), and eventually enlarged and displayed so as to cover the entire display area of the image display device 5 (FIG. 65-24 (26)). After that, on the image display device 5, the normal size jackpot symbol "222" is temporarily stopped and displayed (FIG. 65-24 (27)), and finally the jackpot pattern "222" is stopped and displayed (FIG. 65-24 ( 28)).

(Fanfare effect executed in a high probability state)
Next, the fanfare effect executed in the high-probability state will be described. FIGS. 65-25 and 65-26 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the fanfare effect executed in the high probability state.

When a big win is achieved in a high probability state, fanfare effects are started after the big win symbols are stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 65-19 (21) and FIG. 65-24 (28), for example. In the fanfare effect executed in the high-probability state, first, the image display device 5 displays a background image with a radial pattern, and at the upper right part of the display area displays the characters "Right-handed" and an arrow pointing to the right. . Then, the character display "super" appears from the upper side of the display area of the image display device 5 (Fig. 65-25 (1)), and then an effect display is performed in which the character display "super" moves to the center of the display area (Fig. 65-25(2)).

Next, on the image display device 5, an effect display is performed in which the character display "POWERFUL" is enlarged so that a part of it protrudes from the display area (FIG. 65-26 (3)). Next, in the image display device 5, an effect display is performed in which the entirety of the character display "powerful" is displayed within the display area (FIG. 65-26 (4)).

Next, a part of the character display "BONUS" appears from the lower side of the display area of the image display device 5 (FIG. 65-25 (5)), and then the character display "BONUS" moves to the center of the display area and is displayed entirely. An effect display is performed so that it is displayed so as to fit within the area (FIG. 65-25 (6)).

Next, on the image display device 5, the character display "super", "powerful", and "BONUS" are enlarged, and an effect display is performed in which a part of each is displayed so as to protrude from the display area (FIG. 65-25 (7)). ). After that, on the image display device 5, an effect display is performed in which the character displays "SUPER", "POWERFUL", and "BONUS" are displayed so as to fit in the display area (FIG. 65-25 (8)).

Next, in the image display device 5, an effect display is performed in which the color of the image being displayed is reversed (FIG. 65-26 (9)), and then the color of the image being displayed is reversed again (that is, restored). An effect display is performed (FIG. 65-26 (10)).

Next, a portion of an arrow image resembling a rightward arrow appears from the left side of the display area of the image display device 5 (FIG. 65-26 (11)), and is superimposed on the character display "super", "powerful", and "BONUS". In the form (that is, in a layer higher than the character display "super", "powerful", and "BONUS"), an effect display is performed that moves toward the right side of the display area (FIG. 65-26 (12)). In addition, the arrow image is overlaid with the characters "Right shot".

Next, in the image display device 5, when the tip of the arrow image reaches the right end of the display area (FIG. 65-26 (13)), the effect display moves toward the left side of the display area so as to bounce off the right end of the display area. is performed (FIG. 65-26 (14)). After that, when the rear end of the arrow image reaches the left end of the display area, an effect display is performed to move toward the right side of the display area again (FIG. 65-26 (15)), and the front end of the arrow image reaches the right end of the display area. When it reaches the right end of the display area, the effect display of moving toward the left side of the display area so as to bounce back is repeated (FIG. 65-26 (16)).

(Performance period)
Next, the effect period of each effect will be described. FIG. 65-28 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of each performance period in the case of a big win in super reach (battle). Scenes (25) to (37) shown in FIG. 65-28 respectively correspond to scenes shown in (25) to (31) in FIG. 65-8 and (32) to (37) in FIG. 65-9. The scene (26a) shown in FIG. 65-28 corresponds to the scene after (26) in FIG. 65-8 and before (27) in FIG. 65-8.

As shown in FIG. 65-28, when the super reach (battle) hits a big hit, the character action period during which the movable body effects shown in (25) to (26a) are performed is 1.7 seconds, and ( 27) to (28) show that the enemy character is defeated for 5 seconds, and (29) to (37) show that the big hit symbols are stopped and displayed for 3.8 seconds.

FIG. 65-29 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of each performance period when a super reach (powerful RUSH) wins a big hit. Scenes (11) to (28) shown in FIG. 65-29 correspond to scenes shown in (11) to (12) in FIG. 65-22 and (21) to (28) in FIG. 65-24, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 65-29, when a super reach (powerful RUSH) results in a big hit, the operation promotion period shown in (11) is 3 seconds, and the big win patterns shown in (12) are aligned (the big win is announced). The period is 1 second, the role product operation period shown in (21) to (23) is 2.2 seconds, and the pattern output period in which the jackpot patterns are stopped and displayed shown in (24) to (28) is 3.8 seconds. ing.

FIG. 65-30 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of each performance period in the case of a big win in Super Reach (Pato Pato Attack). Scenes (8) to (21) shown in FIG. 65-30 correspond to scenes shown in (8) to (12) in FIG. 65-17 and (13) to (21) in FIG. 65-19, respectively. Note that FIG. 65-30 shows an example in which the push button 31B is not pressed during the action promotion period.

As shown in FIG. 65-30, when the super reach (Patopato Attack) results in a big hit, the title notification period shown in (8) is 2 seconds, and the introduction period shown in (9) to (11) is 5 seconds. 5 seconds, the operation promotion period shown in (12) is 3 seconds, and the period of announcing the big hit shown in (13) to (21) (the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 is in the lighting mode) is 7.5 seconds.

In this example, the period during which the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in the lighting mode in Super Reach (Pato Pat Attack) is longer than the period during which the movable body 32 is operated in Super Reach (Powerful RUSH). Specifically, the period (7.5 seconds) in which the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 shown in FIG. long. With such a configuration, it is possible to make an impression of the announcement by securing a sufficient period of time during which the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in the lighting mode.

Also, in this example, the effect period of super reach (powerful RUSH) and the effect period of super reach (patto attack) are each an epilogue period (for example, the celebration and afterglow from when the player is notified of the big hit to when the pattern is determined). period, the period during which the ending scene of the super reach production is played). In the epilogue period of Super Reach (Powerful RUSH), the movable body 32 is positioned at the initial position as shown in FIGS. 65-24 (24) to (28) and FIGS. , the combination of the second mini-character 006IWC05 and the decorative pattern serving as a jackpot pattern "222" is displayed. On the other hand, during the epilogue period of Super Reach (Pato Pat Attack), as shown in FIGS. 65-19 (17) to (21) and FIGS. In this state, a combination of decoration symbols "222" which is a big hit symbol is displayed. With such a configuration, super reach (powerful RUSH) and super reach (patto attack) have different effects during the epilogue period, so that each can be impressive. Especially during the epilogue period of Super Reach (Pato Pat Attack), the jackpot pattern is displayed while the Patrump image 006IWG01 is displayed in a lighting mode, so that the winning of Super Reach (Pato Pat Attack) can be impressed. can.

FIG. 65-31 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of each performance period when each Super Reach is lost. Figure 65-31 (A) is an example of a gap in Super Reach (battle), and the scenes (42) to (43) shown in Figure 65-31 (A) are shown in Figure 65-10 (42). (43) respectively correspond to the scenes shown. In addition, Figure 65-31 (B) is an example of deviation in super reach (powerful RUSH), each scene of (18) to (20) shown in Figure 65-31 (B), Figure 65-23 (18) to (20) respectively correspond to the scenes shown. In addition, FIG. 65-31 (C) is an example of a deviation in super reach (Patopato Attack), and each scene of (22) to (24) shown in FIG. 20(22) to 20(24) respectively correspond to the scenes shown.

As shown in FIG. 65-31(A), in the event of a loss in Super Reach (battle), a loss is reported for 1.5 seconds in each scene of (42) to (43). Also, as shown in FIG. 65-31(B), when a super reach (powerful RUSH) results in a deviation, a 3.5-second deviation is reported in each of scenes (18) to (20). In addition, as shown in FIG. 65-31(C), when the Super Reach (Pato Patrol Attack) results in a loss, a 4-second loss notification is given in each of the scenes (22) to (24).

Next, regarding Super Reach (Powerful RUSH), an effect period corresponding to the timing at which a predetermined action is performed will be described. FIG. 65-32 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a display period of fluctuation display of decorative symbols according to the timing of notification by pressing the push button 31B in the super reach (powerful RUSH) jackpot.

FIG. 65-32(A) shows that the pressing operation is performed immediately (approximately 0 seconds later) after the start of the operation promoting period during the operation promoting period for prompting the pressing operation of the push button 31 shown in FIG. 65-22(11). In this case, the performance period until the subsequent jackpot symbols are stopped and displayed is about 7.4 seconds. The pattern shaking period to be performed is about 4 seconds.

FIG. 65-32(B) shows a case where the pressing operation is performed approximately one second after the start of the operation promoting period during the operation promoting period for prompting the pressing operation of the push button 31 shown in FIG. 65-22(11). This is an example, and in this case, the effect period until the subsequent jackpot symbols are stopped and displayed is about 6.4 seconds, during which the jackpot symbols shown in FIG. The period is about 3 seconds.

FIG. 65-32(C) is an example of a case in which the push button 31 is not pushed during the action promotion period for prompting the pushing operation of the push button 31 shown in FIGS. 65-22(11) and 65-29(11). In this case, the effect period until the next big hit pattern is stopped and displayed is about 4.4 seconds. The symbol shaking period during which the stop display is performed is about 1 second. As described above, in this example, the temporary stop display of the big win pattern is performed, although the subsequent performance period differs depending on whether or not the push button 31 is pressed, and if the push button 31 is pressed, depending on the timing. The production period is adjusted by varying the pattern shaking period. That is, the length of only the pattern fluctuation period is changed, and the other performance periods are configured to always have a common length. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the effect control from becoming complicated.

FIG. 65-33 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the fluctuation display period of decorative patterns according to the timing at which notification is given by repeatedly pressing the push button 31B in the variation of the super reach (powerful RUSH) jackpot.

FIG. 65-33(A) shows that, in the action promoting period for prompting repeated pressing of the push button 31 shown in FIG. This is an example of the case where the announcement is made (that is, after a repeated hit operation that satisfies the execution condition is performed). Among them, the symbol shaking period for temporary stop display of the big hit symbol shown in FIG. 65-24 (27) is about 4 seconds.

FIG. 65-33(B) shows an example in which an announcement is made approximately 4 seconds after the start of the action promotion period in the action promotion period that prompts repeated pressing of the push button 31 shown in FIG. This is an example in which the continuous hitting operation that satisfies the execution condition is not performed and the notification is made at the end of the action promotion period), and in this case, the effect period until the subsequent jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed is about 4.4 seconds. 65-24 (27), during which the symbol shaking period during which the temporary stop display of the big winning symbol is performed is about 1 second. As described above, in this example, the performance period after that differs depending on the timing when the notification is made, but the performance period is adjusted by varying the pattern fluctuation period for temporary stop display of the big win pattern. That is, the length of only the pattern fluctuation period is changed, and the other performance periods are configured to always have a common length. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the effect control from becoming complicated.

Next, regarding Super Reach (Patopato Attack), an effect period corresponding to the timing at which a predetermined action is performed will be described. FIG. 65-34 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect period corresponding to the timing at which an announcement is made by depressing the push button 31B in the super reach (patto attack) jackpot.

FIG. 65-34(A) shows that the pressing operation is performed immediately (approximately 0 seconds later) after the start of the operation promoting period during the operation promoting period for prompting the pressing operation of the push button 31 shown in FIG. 65-17(12). In this case, the production period (during this period, the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 in the lighting mode is always displayed) until the subsequent jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed is about 10.5 seconds. The period during which only the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 in the lighting mode shown in FIG. 65-19(13) is displayed is about 5 seconds.

FIG. 65-34(B) shows a case where the pressing operation is performed approximately one second after the start of the operation promoting period in the operation promoting period for prompting the pressing operation of the push button 31 shown in FIG. 65-17(12). This is an example, and in this case, the effect period until the subsequent big hit pattern is stopped and displayed (during this period, the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 in the lighting mode is always displayed) is about 9.5 seconds. The period during which only the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 in the lighting mode shown in 19(13) is displayed is about 4 seconds.

FIG. 65-34(C) is an example of a case where no pressing operation is performed during the action promoting period for prompting the pressing operation of the push button 31 shown in FIGS. 65-17(12) and 65-30(12). In this case, the effect period until the subsequent jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed (during this period, the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 in the lighting mode is always displayed) is about 7.5 seconds. 13), the period during which only the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 in the lighting mode shown in FIG. 65-30 (13) is displayed is about 2 seconds.

In this example, in the case of a super reach (Patopato Attack) jackpot, if the player performs an action before the action promotion period ends, the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in a lighting mode for the remaining period of the action promotion period. It is designed for extended duration. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65-34, when the pressing operation is performed immediately (after about 0 seconds) after the start of the action promotion period, the period during which the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in the lighting mode is about 10.5 seconds, about 9.5 seconds if the button is pressed after about 1 second, and about 7.5 seconds if the action promotion period of 3 seconds elapses without the button being pressed. . With such a configuration, the period in which the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in the lighting mode is lengthened, so that the player can be immersed in the afterglow of the blessing and can be motivated to actively perform the operation. Further, in this example, only the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 in the lighting mode is displayed, although the subsequent performance period differs depending on whether or not the push button 31 is pressed, and if the push button 31 is pressed, on the timing. The performance period is adjusted by varying the period of time. That is, the length of only the period during which only the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 in the lighting mode is displayed changes, and the length of the other performance periods is always the same. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the effect control from becoming complicated.

FIG. 65-35 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect period corresponding to the timing of notification by repeatedly hitting the push button 31B in the modified example of super reach (patto attack) jackpot.

FIG. 65-35(A) shows that, in the action promoting period for prompting repeated pressing of the push button 31 shown in FIG. This is an example of the case where the notification is made by hitting (that is, the repeated hitting operation that satisfies the execution condition is performed), and in this case, the effect period until the subsequent jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed The patrol lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed) is about 9.4 seconds, and the period during which only the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 in the lighting mode shown in FIG. 65-19 (13) is displayed is about 4 seconds.

FIG. 65-35(B) shows an example in which an announcement is made about 4 seconds after the start of the action promotion period in the action promotion period that prompts repeated pressing of the push button 31 shown in FIG. 65-18 (12′) ( In other words, this is an example in which the continuous hit operation that satisfies the execution condition was not performed and the announcement was made at the end of the action promotion period), and in this case, the effect period until the subsequent jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed (this period is always lit) The patrol lamp image 006IWG01 in the lighting mode is displayed for about 6.5 seconds, and the period during which only the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 in the lighting mode shown in FIG. 65-19 (13) is displayed is about 1 second. As described above, in this example, the effect period after that differs depending on the timing of the notification, but the effect period is adjusted by varying the period in which only the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 in the lighting mode is displayed. That is, the length of only the period during which only the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 in the lighting mode is displayed changes, and the length of the other performance periods is always the same. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the effect control from becoming complicated.

FIG. 65-36 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the effect period of the fanfare effect executed in the low-probability state. Scenes (1) to (21) shown in FIG. 65-36 are shown in FIGS. 65-11 (1) to (8), FIGS. Each corresponds to the scene shown in (21). As shown in FIG. 65-36, the effect period of the fanfare effect executed in the low probability state is 14 seconds.

FIG. 65-37 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the effect period of the fanfare effect executed in the high-probability state. Scenes (1) to (16) shown in FIG. 65-37 correspond to scenes shown in FIGS. 65-25 (1) to (8) and FIGS. 65-26 (9) to (16), respectively. As shown in FIG. 65-37, the effect period of the fanfare effect executed in the high probability state is 11 seconds.

In this example, the period during which the patrol lamp is displayed in the lighting mode is longer than the title notification period during which the title is notified in the pre-announcement scene and shorter than the fanfare period. Specifically, the period (7.5 seconds) in which the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in the lighting mode as shown in FIG. -37 is shorter than the fanfare period (11 seconds). With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player aware of winning by making the fanfare period longer while making the announcement conspicuous by sufficiently securing the period in which the patrol lamp is displayed in the lighting mode. You can keep your role well.

Further, in this example, the period during which the patrol lamp is displayed in the lighting mode is longer than the action promoting period in the pre-announcement scene and shorter than the fanfare period. Specifically, the period (7.5 seconds) in which the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in the lighting mode as shown in FIG. shorter than the fanfare period (11 seconds). With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player aware of winning by making the fanfare period longer while making the announcement conspicuous by sufficiently securing the period in which the patrol lamp is displayed in the lighting mode. You can keep your role well.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 65-19, the patrol lamp is always displayed in the lighting mode until the jackpot symbol is stopped after the predetermined operation is performed (or after the operation promotion period has elapsed). However, not limited to such a configuration, when a predetermined operation is performed (or when the operation promotion period elapses), the patrol lamp in the lighting mode is displayed for a predetermined period, and after that, the patrol lamp is not displayed. There may be a period (for example, only the big hit symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed are displayed). In this case as well, the period in which the patrol lamp is displayed in the lighting mode is longer than the title notification period and the action promotion period in the pre-announcement scene, and is shorter than the fanfare period, so that the role of each period can be maintained appropriately. can.

Next, a modification of the super reach (Patopato Attack) effect will be described. FIGS. 65-38 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of modifications in which the condensing effect presentation is executed before the action promoting period.

FIG. 65-38 shows a scene in which an action prompting display including a push button image 006IWG02 is displayed in Super Reach (Pato Pat Attack) (corresponding to FIG. 65-17 (12) or FIG. 65-18 (12') ), an example is shown in which a condensing effect presentation is performed for displaying a preceding stage of the push button image 006IWG02.

In the example of the first condensing effect effect shown in FIG. 65-38, the effect display transitions in the order of (11a′) (11b′) (11c′) (12′), and is applied to a modification that requires repeated hitting operations. It is possible. The scene of FIGS. 65-38 (12′) in the example of the first condensing effect production corresponds to FIG. 65-18 (12′), and FIGS. are inserted after Figure 65-18 (11) and before Figure 65-18 (12').

Specifically, when applying the first condensing effect production to the modified example that requires repeated hitting operations, after the scene of FIG. 65-18 (11), as shown in FIG. The display area of the image display device 5 is darkened (for example, the background is switched to black), and an effect display is performed in which the second teammate character image 006IWC02 wearing the patrol trump image 006IWG01 is displayed. At this time, as shown in FIGS. 65-27 (1) to (4),

Next, as shown in FIG. 65-38 (11b′), a plurality of (three in this example) mini push button images 006IWG02a imitating the push button 31B are partially superimposed on the second teammate character image 006IWC02. It is displayed in a luminous state, and an effect display is performed to start moving so as to gather in one place. These push button images are displayed in a layer above the second teammate character image 006IWC02, but since they have a high degree of transparency, the second teammate character in the lower layer can be displayed through the mini push button image 006IWG02a. Image 006IWC02 is visible.

Then, the plurality of mini-push button images 006IWG02a gradually slows down, and as shown in FIG. is displayed.

Thereafter, when the plurality of mini-push button images 006IWG02a are gradually slowed down and combined into one, the display area of the image display device 5 becomes bright again as shown in FIG. Along with the image 006IWG01 and the second teammate character image 006IWC02, an effect display is performed in which the push button image 006IWG02 and the character display "Continuous Hit" are displayed as an action prompting display for prompting the player to repeatedly press the push button 31B. In the first condensing effect production, the second teammate character image 006IWC02 is displayed as shown in FIGS. Although it is displayed in a manner of moving left and right, it is not limited to such a configuration, and for example, the periods shown in FIGS. '), the second teammate character image 006IWC02 may be displayed stationary, and from the next scene, the second teammate character image 006IWC02 may be displayed moving left and right. . Also, for example, the second teammate character image 006IWC02 may be displayed in a stationary state at all times, similar to the second condensing effect rendering described later.

In the example of the second condensing effect effect shown in FIG. 65-38, the effect display transitions in the order of (11a), (11b), (11c), and (12), and can be applied to an example in which a pressing operation is required. The scene of FIG. 65-38 (12) in the example of the second light gathering effect production corresponds to FIG. 65-17 (12), and the scenes of FIGS. It is inserted after FIG. 65-17(11) and before FIG. 65-17(12).

Specifically, when applying the second condensing effect presentation to an example requiring a pressing operation, after the scene of FIG. The display area of the device 5 is darkened (for example, the background is switched to black), and an effect display is performed in which the second teammate character image 006IWC02 wearing the patrol card image 006IWG01 is displayed in a stationary state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65-38 (11b), a plurality of (three in this example) mini-push buttons imitating the push button 31B are partially superimposed on the second teammate character image 006IWC02 displayed in a stationary state. The button images 006IWG02a are displayed in a luminous state, and an effect display is performed in which they start to move so that they gather in one place. These mini-push button images 006IWG02a are displayed in a higher layer than the second teammate character image 006IWC02. A teammate character image 006IWC02 is visible.

Then, the plurality of mini-push button images 006IWG02a gradually slows down, and as shown in FIG. The effect display to be displayed is performed.

After that, when the plurality of mini-push button images 006IWG02a are gradually slowed down and combined into one, the display area of the image display device 5 becomes bright again as shown in FIG. Along with 006IWG01 and the second teammate character image 006IWC02, an effect display is performed in which the push button image 006IWG02 and the text "Push!"

In this example, during the periods (11a), (11b), (11c), and (12) in which the second condensing effect production is performed, the second teammate character image 006IWC02 wearing the patrol trump image 006IWG01 is displayed in a stationary state. be. In other words, the display preceding the push button image 006IWG02 (in this example, a plurality of mini push button images 006IWG02a) is displayed in a manner involving movement, while the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 and the second teammate character image 006IWC02 are displayed in a stationary state. Is displayed. With such a configuration, attention can be drawn to any display.

Next, the rendering period when applying the condensing effect rendering will be described. FIG. 65-39 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation period of the light gathering effect presentation. Note that FIG. 65-39 shows an example in which no pressing operation is performed.

As shown in FIG. 65-39, when the condensing effect effect is applied, the period during which the condensing effect effect is performed (for example, the period corresponding to (11a) to (11c) in FIG. 65-38) is about 1 second. . Then, when the pressing operation is not performed, the period during which the action prompting display is performed (for example, the period corresponding to FIGS. 65-38 (12) and 65-17 (12)) is about 3 seconds. The production period until the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed (during this period, the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 in the lighting mode is always displayed) is about 7.5 seconds, of which the patrol lamp in the lighting mode shown in Fig. 65-19 (13). The period during which only the image 006IWG01 is displayed is about 2 seconds.

In this example, multiple illuminated mini push button images 006IWG02a are coalesced as shown in FIGS. It is possible to execute a condensing effect production in which the push button image 006IWG02 is displayed. Then, when the light gathering effect presentation is executed, the period during which the patrol lamp is displayed in the lighting mode is set to be longer than the total period of the light gathering effect presentation period and the operation promotion period. It is configured. Specifically, the condensing effect rendering period (0.1+0.3+0.6=1 second) shown in FIGS. 65-38 and 65-39 and the action promotion period (3 seconds) shown in FIG. The period (7.5 seconds) in which the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 shown in FIG. 65-39 is displayed in the lighting mode is longer than the period (4 seconds). With such a configuration, it is possible to make the announcement conspicuous by securing a sufficient period in which the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in the lighting mode, and to improve interest.

As described above, the characterizing portion 006IW discloses the following configuration of the gaming machine.

(Means 1-1) The gaming machine disclosed in this characteristic part 006IW is a gaming machine for playing a game, and includes display means (for example, image display device 5), and the display means includes a pre-announcement scene (for example, 65-17 (8) to (12) and FIG. mode (dark red mode).Refer to the left side of FIG. 65-15(B)), and the character (for example, the second teammate character image 006IWC02) is displayed in the first display mode (for example, the expression full of expectation). (See, for example, FIGS. 65-17 (12) and 65-18 (12′)) If the result of the lottery is winning, after the pre-announcement scene, the notification object is displayed in the notification mode (for example, the lighting mode (lighting red)). 65-15 (B) right side, see FIG. 65-19 (13)), and the character is displayed in a second display mode different from the first display mode (for example, a happy mode. FIG. 65-19 (15 ), see (16)), and if the result of the lottery is non-winning, after the pre-announcement scene, the announcement object is displayed in a non-announcement mode, and the character is displayed in the first display mode and the second display mode. It is displayed in a different third display mode (for example, a disappointing mode, see Fig. 65-20 (22)). With such a configuration, winning or not winning can be communicated in an easy-to-understand manner by additionally changing the display mode of the character while suggesting the winning or not with the mode of the notification object.

Further, the characterizing portion 006IW discloses the configuration of the game machine shown in the following (means 1-2) to (means 1-5).

(Means 1-2) In means 1-1, the size of the announcement object is displayed in a non-announcement mode after the pre-announcement scene when the result of the lottery is non-winning. (For example, the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 in the lighting mode after the winning announcement shown in FIG. The display size is larger than the image 006IWG01), and when the result of the lottery is non-winning, the display in the non-announcement mode after the pre-announcement scene is better than the non-announcement mode in the pre-announcement scene. is also larger (for example, the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 in the non-lighting mode after the notice of deviation shown in FIG. 65-40 (1) is the scene before the notice shown in FIGS. The display size is larger than that of the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 in the non-lighting mode). With such a configuration, winning can be favorably appealed by making the announcement object appear larger when announcing the winning. In addition, even in the non-notification mode, the non-winning can be easily recognized by making the scene appear larger than the scene before the announcement when notifying the non-winning.

(Means 1-3) In means 1-1 or 1-2, if the result of the lottery is winning, the display means displays the announcement object in an announcement mode without displaying the character after the pre-announcement scene. After that, the notification object is displayed in the notification mode, and the character is displayed in the second display mode (for example, as shown in FIG. After that, as shown in FIGS. 65-19 (14) to (16), the patrol trump image 006IWG01 is displayed in a lighting mode, and the second teammate character image 006IWC02 is displayed in a happy mode), and the result of the lottery is non-winning. In this case, after the scene before the announcement, the announcement object is displayed in the non-announcement mode, and the character is displayed in the third display mode (for example, as shown in FIG. and displays the second teammate character image 006IWC02 in a disappointing manner). With such a configuration, when the winning is announced, only the notification object of the notification mode is displayed without displaying the character, so that the content of the notification can be made easy to understand.

(Means 1-4) In any of means 1-1 to 1-3, if the result of the lottery is winning, the display means, after the pre-announcement scene, displays the character with the same facial expression as in the pre-announcement scene. 65-19(13) and before the scene shown in FIG. Then, the character is displayed with a surprised expression, then the character is displayed with a happy expression, and then the character is displayed with a happy action (for example, the second ally character The image 006IWC02 is displayed in the order of surprised facial expression (FIG. 65-19 (14)), happy facial expression (FIG. 65-19 (15)), and happy action (FIG. 65-19 (16)). . With such a configuration, the facial expression of the character transitions to the facial expression that the player wants to hold, so that an environment that is easy for the player to tune in and enjoy can be provided.

(Means 1-5) In any one of means 1-1 to 1-4, the background color of the display means is the first color (for example, a white-based color scheme) in the pre-announcement scene, and the result of the lottery is winning. , after the scene before the announcement, it will be a different color from the first color (for example, a red-based color scheme), and if the result of the lottery is not won, after the scene before the announcement, it will be the same as the first color It becomes a system color (for example, a white-based color scheme). With such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize winning or non-winning from the change in the background color.

Further, the characterizing portion 006IW discloses the configuration of the game machine shown in (means 2-1) to (means 2-4) shown below.

(Means 2-1) A gaming machine for playing a game, comprising a display means (for example, an image display device 5), and the display means includes an announcement object and a character (for example, a patrol card image 006IWG01 and a second teammate character image 006IWC02). can be displayed in the pre-announcement scene (for example, the production period corresponding to FIGS. 65-17 (8) to (12) and FIGS. 65-18 (8) to (12′)), and the announcement object is displayed in a non-announcement mode (for example, non-lighting mode (dark red mode); see the left side of FIG. 65-15 (B)), and the character is displayed in the first display mode (for example, an expectant expression) ( For example, see FIGS. 65-17 (12) and 65-18 (12′)), if the result of the lottery is winning, after the pre-announcement scene, the notification object is set in the notification mode (for example, the lighting mode (red glowing mode)). 65-15 (B) right side, see FIG. 65-19 (13)), and the character is displayed in a second display mode different from the first display mode (for example, a happy mode; FIG. 65-19 (15)). , (16)), and if the result of the lottery is non-winning, after the scene before the announcement, the announcement object is displayed in a non-announcement mode, and the character is displayed in a different manner from the first display mode and the second display mode. Display in a third display mode (for example, a disappointing mode; see FIG. 65-20 (22)), and in the pre-announcement scene, an action prompting display prompting the player to act is displayed at a position where the announcing object can be seen. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 65-17 (12) and 65-18 (12′), the push button image 006IWG02 and the character display of “Press!” Or at least a position where a part of the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 overlaps in a visible state)), and if the result of the lottery is winning, if the player performs an action during the action promotion period in which the action promotion display is displayed , the notification object is displayed in the notification mode (for example, when the push button 31B is pressed in the state shown in FIG. 65-17 (12), or when the push button 31B is pressed in the state shown in FIG. 65-19 (13) and the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in a lighting mode). With such a configuration, winning or not winning can be communicated in an easy-to-understand manner by additionally changing the display mode of the character while suggesting the winning or not with the mode of the notification object. By displaying the action prompting display at a position where the notification object can be visually recognized, attention can be drawn to both the presence of the notification object and the presence of the action prompting display.

(Means 2-2) In means 2-1, the action-promoting display includes an image-promoting display simulating an object to perform an action and a character-promoting display using characters (for example, FIG. 65-17 (12), FIG. 65 -18 (12'), including the push button image 006IWG02 and the character display of "Push!" Display so as not to cover (for example, as shown in FIGS. 65-17 (12), 65-18 (12′), and 65-27, the push button image 006IWG02 and the “press!” A character display is displayed at a position that does not overlap the patrol card image 006IWG01 (or at least a position that overlaps the patrol card image 006IWG01 in a visible state). With such a configuration, it is possible to always draw attention to the notification object.

(Means 2-3) In means 2-1 or 2-2, the display means performs display so that the operation of the image promotion display is not synchronized with the operation of the notification object and the operation of the character (for example, FIG. 65- As shown in 27, the push button image 006IWG02 is displayed so that the button portion is not depressed (FIG. 65-27 (1)) and depressed (FIG. 65-27 (2)). , the patrol trump image 006IWG01 and the second ally character image 006IWC02 are motion-displayed so as to repeatedly move to the right (FIG. 65-27(1)) and to the left (FIG. 65-27(2)). behavior appears to be out of sync). With such a configuration, attention can be drawn to any display.

(Means 2-4) In any one of means 2-1 to 2-3, the display means statically displays the notification object and the character when displaying the image-promoted display, and the image-promoted display is accompanied by an action. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 65-38 (11a) to (12), the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 and the second teammate character image 006IWC02 are displayed in a stationary state, while a plurality of buttons preceding the push button image 006IWG02 The mini-push button image 006IWG02a is displayed in a manner that accompanies the action). With such a configuration, attention can be drawn to any display.

Further, the characterizing portion 006IW discloses the configuration of the gaming machine shown in the following (means 3-1) to (means 3-2).

(Means 3-1) A gaming machine for playing a game, comprising a display means (for example, an image display device 5), and the display means displays pre-announcement scenes (for example, FIGS. 65-17 (8) to (12) and 65-18 (8) to (12′)), the notification object (for example, patrol lamp image 006IWG01) is changed to a non-notification mode (for example, non-lighting mode (dark red mode). FIG. 65-15). (B) left side), and the character (for example, the second teammate character image 006IWC02) is displayed in the first display mode (for example, the expression full of expectation) (for example, FIG. 65-17 (12), FIG. 65-18 (12′)), if the result of the lottery is winning, after the pre-announcement scene, the notification object is displayed in the notification mode (for example, the lighting mode (red glowing mode). Right side of FIG. 65-15(B), 65-19 (13)), the character is displayed in a second display mode different from the first display mode (for example, happy mode, see FIGS. 65-19 (15) and (16)), and the lottery is not won, the announcement object is displayed in a non-announcement mode after the pre-announcement scene, and the character is displayed in a third display mode different from the first and second display modes (for example, a disappointing mode). 65-20 (22)), the title is announced in the pre-announcement scene (for example, the titles shown in FIGS. 65-17 (8) and 65-18 (8) are announced), The announcement period in which the object is displayed in the announcement mode is longer than the title announcement period in which the title announcement is performed and shorter than the fanfare period (for example, as shown in FIG. 65-30, the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 is The period (7.5 seconds) is longer than the title announcement period (2 seconds) during which the title announcement is made and shorter than the fanfare period (11 seconds) as shown in FIGS. 65-37). With such a configuration, winning or not winning can be communicated in an easy-to-understand manner by additionally changing the display mode of the character while suggesting the winning or not with the mode of the notification object. In addition, by securing a sufficient period during which the notification object is displayed in the notification mode, the notification is conspicuous, and by making the fanfare period longer, the player can be made aware of the winning, and the role of each period is suitable. can be kept in

(Means 3-2) In means 3-1, the title display displayed as the title notification includes an image corresponding to the notification object and a character display related to the notification object (for example, FIG. 65-17 (8), FIG. 65 As shown in -18 (8), the title display displayed as the title notification includes three effect images corresponding to the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 and the character display of "Patopato" related to the patrol lamp), The character display is emphasized more than the other character displays (for example, as shown in FIGS. 65-17(8) and 65-18(8), the character display "Patopato" is the character display "Push chance Also, for example, only the character display "Patopato" may be displayed with an effect or may be operated). With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player strongly recognize the notification object.

Further, the characterizing portion 006IW discloses the configuration of the game machine shown in the following (means 4-1) to (means 4-3).

(Means 4-1) A gaming machine for playing a game, comprising display means (for example, an image display device 5), and the display means displays pre-announcement scenes (for example, FIGS. 65-17 (8) to (12) and 65-18 (8) to (12′)), the notification object (for example, patrol lamp image 006IWG01) is changed to a non-notification mode (for example, non-lighting mode (dark red mode). FIG. 65-15). (B) left side), and the character (for example, the second teammate character image 006IWC02) is displayed in the first display mode (for example, the expression full of expectation) (for example, FIG. 65-17 (12), FIG. 65-18 (12′)), if the result of the lottery is winning, after the pre-announcement scene, the notification object is displayed in the notification mode (for example, the lighting mode (red glowing mode). Right side of FIG. 65-15(B), 65-19 (13)), the character is displayed in a second display mode different from the first display mode (for example, happy mode, see FIGS. 65-19 (15) and (16)), and the lottery is not won, the announcement object is displayed in a non-announcement mode after the pre-announcement scene, and the character is displayed in a third display mode different from the first and second display modes (for example, a disappointing mode). 65-20 (22)), and in the pre-announcement scene, the player is encouraged to act (for example, shown in FIGS. 65-17 (12) and 65-18 (12′)). If the result of the lottery is a win, the display means displays the push button image 006IWG02 and the character display of "press!" When the action is performed, the notification object is displayed in the notification mode (for example, when the push button 31B is pressed in the state shown in FIG. 65-17 (12), or 65-19 (13) and the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in a lighting mode). , the notification period during which the notification object is displayed in the notification mode is longer than the action promotion period and shorter than the fanfare period (for example, the period during which the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in the lighting mode as shown in FIGS. 65-30 (7 .5 seconds) is longer than the motion promotion period (3 seconds) and shorter than the fanfare period (11 seconds) as shown in FIGS. 65-37). With such a configuration, winning or not winning can be communicated in an easy-to-understand manner by additionally changing the display mode of the character while suggesting the winning or not with the mode of the notification object. In addition, by securing a sufficient period during which the notification object is displayed in the notification mode, the notification is conspicuous, and by making the fanfare period longer, the player can be made aware of the winning, and the role of each period is suitable. can be kept in

(Means 4-2) In means 4-1, as an action promotion, an image promotion display simulating an object to perform the action is displayed (for example, FIG. 65-17 (12), FIG. As shown in 65-38 (12), (12'), the push button image 006IWG02 is displayed), and before the action promotion is performed, the front stage display of the image promotion display is executed (for example, FIG. 65 -38 As shown in (11a') to (12'), (11a) to (12), a light condensing effect effect in which a plurality of shining mini push button images 006IWG02a are combined to display a push button image 006IWG02) The notification period is longer than the total period of the pre-stage effect period during which the pre-stage effect is executed and the action promotion period (for example, the condensing effect effect period shown in FIGS. 65-38 and 65-39 (0.1 + 0.3 + 0.6 = 1 second) and the operation promotion period (3 seconds) shown in FIG. (7.5 seconds) is longer). With such a configuration, it is possible to make the announcement stand out by securing a sufficient period of time during which the announcement object is displayed in the announcement mode, thereby improving interest.

(Means 4-3) In means 4-1 or 4-2, if the player performs an action before the end of the action promotion period, the notice object is displayed in the notice mode for the remaining period of the action promotion period. (For example, as shown in FIG. 65-34, when the pressing operation is performed immediately (after about 0 seconds) after the start of the action promotion period, the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in a lighting mode. If the pressing operation is performed after about 1 second, it will be about 9.5 seconds. 7.5 seconds). With such a configuration, the period during which the notification object is displayed in the notification mode is lengthened, so that the player can be immersed in the afterglow of the blessing.

Further, the characterizing portion 006IW discloses the configuration of the gaming machine shown in the following (means 5-1) to (means 5-3).

(Means 5-1) A gaming machine for playing a game, capable of executing a first effect and a second effect for notifying winning, and in the first effect, a fanning scene is performed, and then the movable body is operated. (For example, super reach (powerful RUSH) effect when selecting powerful RUSH mode shown in FIGS. 65-21, 65-22, 65-23, and 65-24), the second In the scene before the announcement, the announcement object is displayed in the non-announcement mode, the character is displayed in the first display mode, and thereafter the announcement object is displayed in the announcement mode without moving the movable body, and the character is displayed. is displayed in a second display mode that is different from the first display mode (for example, patropato shown in FIGS. 65-16, 65-17, 65-18, and 65-19). The period during which the notification object is displayed in the notification mode in the second effect is longer than the period during which the movable body is operated in the first effect. (For example, the period (7.5 seconds) in which the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 shown in FIG. 65-30 is displayed in the lighting mode is longer than the role product operation period (2.2 seconds) shown in FIG. 65-29.) . With such a configuration, it is possible to make an impression of the announcement by securing a sufficient period of time during which the announcement object is displayed in the announcement mode.

(Means 5-2) In means 5-1, identification information (for example, special symbols) is variably displayed, and when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display result, the player wins. A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state) that is advantageous to the player, and is capable of executing variable display of performance identification information (for example, decorative symbols) in response to variable display of identification information. The production period of the 1st production and the production period of the 2nd production are epilogue periods (for example, the celebration/reverberation period from when the player is notified of the jackpot to when the pattern is determined, and the final scene of the super reach effect is reproduced. period), and in the epilogue period of the first effect, the movable body is positioned at the retracted position, and the variable display result of the effect identification information corresponding to the character and the specific display result is displayed (for example, FIG. 65-24 (24) 65-29(24)-(28), the movable body 32 is positioned at the initial position, and the combination of the second mini-character 006IWC05 and the decorative pattern "222", which is the jackpot pattern, is displayed. ), and in the epilogue period of the second effect, the variable display result of the effect identification information corresponding to the specific display result is displayed while the notification object is being displayed in the notification mode (for example, FIG. 65-19 (17 ) to (21) and FIG. 65-30 (17) to (21), in a state in which the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 is displayed in the lighting mode, a combination of decorative patterns "222" which is a jackpot pattern is displayed. ). With such a configuration, since the effects in the epilogue period are different between the first effect and the second effect, each can be impressive. Especially in the epilogue period of the second effect, the variable display result of the effect identification information corresponding to the specific display result is displayed in a state where the notification object is displayed in the notification mode, thereby impressing the winning in the second effect. be able to.

(Means 5-3) In means 5-1 or 5-2, the first effect and the second effect are effects executed based on the same variation pattern (for example, the variation shown in FIG. 65-2). When the pattern PA2-4 or the variation pattern PB2-4 is determined, if the production mode is a powerful RUSH mode, a super reach (powerful RUSH) production is executed, and if the production mode is a patopato attack mode, a super reach ( When the first performance is executed based on one variation pattern, and when the second performance is performed based on the one variation pattern, from the start of variation The period until the end of the fluctuation is the same (for example, when the super reach (powerful RUSH) effect or the super reach (patto attack) effect is executed based on the fluctuation pattern PA2-4 as shown in FIG. 65-2 are 80 seconds, and 100 seconds when the super reach (powerful RUSH) effect or the super reach (Patopato Attack) effect is executed based on the variation patterns PB2-4). With such a configuration, it is possible to execute a plurality of effects based on the same variation pattern, and to impress the notification using the notification object.

Further, the characterizing portion 006IW discloses the configuration of the gaming machine shown in the following (means 6-1) to (means 6-2).

(Means 6-1) A gaming machine for playing a game, comprising display means and sound output means (for example, speakers 8L and 8R). Second teammate character image 006IWC02) can be displayed in the pre-announcement scene (for example, the production period corresponding to FIGS. 65-17 (8) to (12) and FIGS. 65-18 (8) to (12′)), In the pre-announcement scene, the announcement object is displayed in a non-announcement mode (for example, a non-lighting mode (dark red mode); see the left side of FIG. 65-15(B)), and the character is displayed in a first display mode (for example, full of expectations). 65-17 (12) and 65-18 (12')), and if the result of the lottery is a winner, the announcement object is displayed in an announcement mode (for example, after the pre-announcement scene) 65-15(B) right side, FIG. 65-19(13)), and the character is displayed in a second display mode different from the first display mode (for example, a happy mode). 65-19 (15) and (16)), and if the result of the lottery is non-winning, after the scene before the announcement, the announcement object is displayed in the non-announcement mode, and the character is displayed in the first display mode and Display in a third display mode different from the second display mode (for example, a disappointing mode; see FIG. 65-20 (22)), and the sound output means interlocks with displaying the notification object in the notification mode A notification sound is output, and then the voice of the character is output (for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in 65-19 (14) to (16), character voices such as "Ha", "Yatta", and "Yay, Yay" are output in voice tones corresponding to the characters). With such a configuration, winning or not winning can be communicated in an easy-to-understand manner by additionally changing the display mode of the character while suggesting the winning or not with the mode of the notification object. In addition, by outputting the notification sound and the voice of the character in order, it is possible to make winning more exciting.

(Means 6-2) In means 6-1, the sound output means does not output the sound corresponding to displaying the announcement object in a non-announcement mode, and outputs the voice of the character when the result of the lottery is non-winning. output (for example, as shown in FIG. 65-20 (22), the sound corresponding to displaying the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 in a non-lighting mode is not output, and the character voice of the voice tone corresponding to the character is -!”), and if the result of the lottery is winning, the period during which the announcement sound is output is longer than the period during which the character's voice is output (for example, as shown in FIG. 65-19 (13) During the period in which the notification sound is output in conjunction with the display of the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 in the lighting mode, as shown in FIGS. (longer than the period during which each character voice is output for "Yay, Yay"). Longer than the output period (for example, as shown in Fig. 65-19 (14) to (16), each character such as "ha", "yatta", "wai, wai" with a voice corresponding to the character at the time of the big hit The period for outputting the voice is longer than the period for outputting the character voice saying "Good luck next time!" With such a configuration, the notification can be appealed by outputting the notification sound, and the winning can be excited, and the state of the notification object, that is, whether or not the notification object is accepted can be known by the presence or absence of the output of the notification sound. In the case of non-winning, no notification sound is output, but the voice of the character is output, thereby avoiding the situation where there is no sound and the player is getting too excited, and the disappointment of the player can be reduced. .

In the example shown in the characteristic part 006IW described above, when using the expression "the result of the lottery is winning", it means that the display result of the special game is "big hit", and "the result of the lottery is non- When using the expression "winning", it was explained that the display result of the special game is "losing", but not limited to this, in means 1-1 to means 6-2, The expression “lottery result wins” means that a lottery regarding the effect is performed in the variable display start setting process executed on the effect control board 12 side, and a predetermined effect (specifically, the patrol card image 006IWG01 is It may also include the meaning that the execution decision is made for the effect of notifying the big win in the lighting mode. Also, for example, the expression “the lottery result is not won” means that in the variable display start setting process executed on the effect control board 12 side, a lottery related to the effect is performed, and a predetermined effect (specifically, It may also include the meaning that the execution decision of the performance in which the patrol lamp image 006IWG01 turns into a lighting mode to announce a big win) has not been made.

Further, for example, the configuration shown in this characteristic part 006IW can be applied to a slot machine in addition to a pachinko machine. The lottery may mean winning a bonus combination.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Effect control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that executes variable display of specific identification information, and is controllable to an advantageous state for a player when a specific display result is derived as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
game control means;
production control means;
a display means;
The display means is
In the pre-announcement scene, displaying the announcement object in the non-announcement mode and displaying the character in the first display mode,
when the specific display result is derived, after the pre-announcement scene, displaying the notification object in an announcement mode and displaying the character in a second display mode different from the first display mode;
When the specific display result is not derived, after the pre-announcement scene, the notification object is displayed in a non-announcement mode, and the character is displayed in a third display mode different from the first display mode and the second display mode. death,
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information,
The effect control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information,
In one production mode, a plurality of types of background images including a first background image and a second background image can be switched and displayed,
When the background image is switched from the first background image to the second background image, background fade-out display is performed to gradually increase the transparency of the first background image and erase it, and the background fade-out display of the first background image is performed. is capable of executing a background fade-in display in which the transparency of the second background image is gradually reduced when executing
When the variable display of the decoration identification information is started, identification information fade-out display can be executed in which the transparency of the decoration identification information is gradually increased and erased,
When ending the variable display of the decoration identification information, identification information fade-in display can be executed in which the transparency of the decoration identification information is gradually reduced,
the execution period of the background fade-in display is longer than the execution period of the identification information fade-in display;
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images